TW435049B - Remote supervisory control system - Google Patents

Remote supervisory control system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW435049B
TW435049B TW88110732A TW88110732A TW435049B TW 435049 B TW435049 B TW 435049B TW 88110732 A TW88110732 A TW 88110732A TW 88110732 A TW88110732 A TW 88110732A TW 435049 B TW435049 B TW 435049B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
control
address
terminal
section
load
Prior art date
Application number
TW88110732A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Yoshiharu Ito
Shinji Sakasegawa
Hajime Yabu
Yuichi Yoshimura
Original Assignee
Matsushita Electric Works Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP19682498A external-priority patent/JP3752852B2/en
Priority claimed from JP10179437A external-priority patent/JP2000012242A/en
Priority claimed from JP10178361A external-priority patent/JP2000013415A/en
Priority claimed from JP17835998A external-priority patent/JP3718999B2/en
Application filed by Matsushita Electric Works Ltd filed Critical Matsushita Electric Works Ltd
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW435049B publication Critical patent/TW435049B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Selective Calling Equipment (AREA)
  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)

Abstract

A control terminal 32 includes an individual address setting section 12 for setting a unique individual address, and a simultaneous control address setting section 13 for setting a simultaneous control address common to the plurality of control terminals 32. A simultaneous control address is commonly assigned to the control terminals 32 to be subjected to group control. When an UP switch Sb or a DOWN switch Sc of an operation terminal 31b for group dimming purpose is pushed, a transfer signal including the simultaneous control address is transmitted to a signal line Ls from a transfer controller 30. The respective control terminals 32 substantially simultaneously receive the transfer signal, thereby changing intensity of illumination loads.

Description

435 0 4 9^ A7 _B7 五、發明說明(]) 景 背 之 明 發 域 領 之 發 統 系 視 監 控 遙 種1 於 關 係 明藝 發技 本關 相 器 制 圖控 如移 形轉 構一 有括 具包 種統 1 糸 供視 提監 曾控 們遙 人該 知。 習統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 示所 中 至 接 逋 一及 線 號 訊 線 S AN 二 之 ο 3 器 制 控 移 轉 通Μ 予 S 線 號 訊 線 && ,Μ 然予 隹 2 翻 3 。 子 32端 子 制 端控 制一 控簞 及一 31及 子31 端子 作端 操作 多操 許 一 至單 接, 連例 接實 連之點一不 多例 過在 子明 端照 制括 控包 多 一 很 * 及例 31實 子之 端示 作例 操在 多 * 很且 上而 際 。 FI S 實 L ’ 線 LS號 線訊 號至 訊接 至連 接可 連32 端照明 制 至照 控給或 由供32 且制子 並控端 - 供制 32一 控 子。至 端度人 制強併 控之以 至光予 接之可 連出 , Μ 輸器 予載光 33負減 具明之 器照率 明自功 照 令 之 之指載 載32負 負子明 Μ 情輸 予之載 器燈負 光光明 減螢照 * 如自 形諸到 情燈收 數電在 多放。 大為33 之載具 燈負器 熾明明 白 照 照 為在至 載 〇 入 負 3 併 明子Μ 照端予 在制器 。 控光 CO 至減 具入 -器併形 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂· .線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 或方 抑之 加 令 增指 始所 ΜΗ /Λ 及32 * 子 令端 指制 之控 少, 減時 或令 抑指 加之 增度 Κ 強 予之 度光 強之 之出 光輸 之少 出減 時 〇 令 度 指強 之之 變出 改輸 度光 強之 光刻 止時 終之 到時 收令 在指 。 到 度收 強在 之持 出保 輸32 光子 變端 改制 - 控 式 , 變 改 度 強 之 出 輸 光 始 開 即 亦 數 參 間制 刻控 時之 二 型 此此 在。 0 度 刻強 時之 之出 變輸 改光 度變 強改 之動 出自 二輸32 令光子 指成端 僅完制 , 及控 式 ,, 方刻間 此時期 Μ之之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4 / ' Α7 Β7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 端子稱作自 操作端子 明或照明負 κ及開始及 及開始及停 及增加操作 操作端子 位址*轉移 轉移控制 之轉移訊號 24V) *包含 訊號Vs之模 制端子3 2之 測傳輸誤差 子3 1或控制 回期間WT。 。在每一操 收之轉移訊 ,控制資料 號返回期間 通過使用適 號)。 五、發明說明(2) 主減光器端子。 31配備有三按壓型開關Sa至Sc。開關Sa指令照 載之消光*及開關Sb指令增加光輸出之強度, 停止增加。開關Sc指令減少光輸出之強度,Μ 止減少。使用者壓下開關Sb及Sc *而開始滅少 |並且使用者釋放該二開關*而停止此等操作。 31及控制端子32設有個別位址。通過使用該等 控制器30感知個別操作端子31及控制端子32。 器30通過訊號線Ls*發出一有圖9A中所示格式 Vs。轉移訊號Vs為一種雙極時分多工訊號(土 —表示訊號傳輸開始之同步訊號SY;表示轉移 式之横式資料HD;供個別調用操作端子31及控 位址資科AD;供控制負載L之控制資料CD:供檢 之檢査和資科CS; K及一用作供接收自操作端 端子32返回之訊號(監視資料)之時隙之訊號返 資料通過賑衝寬度調變予Μ轉移。(請見圖9B) 作端子31及控制端子32,如果藉由訊號線Ls接 號Vs所傅送之位址資料AD匹配一預先設定位址 CD便自轉移訊號Vs被截留。在轉移訊號Vs之訊 WT,監視資料返回作為目前模式訊號(亦即, 當低姐抗之工具,使訊號線Ls短路所傳輸之訊 在轉移控制器30傳輸資料至希望之操作端子31及控制端 子32之一畤,轉移訊號Vs之模式資料被設定至控制模式 本紙張尺度適用申國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X297公釐) 1---I nl—411 i -111 I I — 訂---I I----4 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 5 435049 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(3) ,並且轉移訊號Vs之位址資料AD被設定至操作端子31或控 制端子32之位址。通過訊號線Ls發出如此設定之轉移訊號 Vs,並且位址匹配轉移訊號Vs之位址資科AD之操作端子31 或控制端子32接收控制資料CD。在訊號返回期間^ ’已接 收控制資料之端子使監視資料返回。依據在訊號返回期間 WT自轉移控制器30所傳輸控制資料CD與所接收監視資料間 之關係,轉移控制器30可確定控制資料CD是否已傳输至希 望之操作端子31或控制端子32。在控制端子32接收控制資 料CD之情形,控制端子32輸出一負載控制訊號*供根據控 制資料CD控制負載L。在操作端子31接收挖制資料CD之情 形,操作端子31輸出一監視訊號*供根搛控制資料CD檢査 及指示負載L之操作。 轉移控制器30通常在既定時間間隔傳轆一模式資料HD予 K設定至虛擬模式之轉移訊號Vs*並且位址資料AD予K循 瑁改變(亦即一種全時輪詢操作)。在操作端子31試圆發出 任何資訊至轉移控制器30時,便與虚擬模式之轉移訊號VS 之同步訊號SY同步,產生一諸如圖9C中所示者之中斷訊虢 。此時,操作端子31設定一中斷旗標,藉Μ準備與轉移控 制器30之釀後資訊交換。在收到中斷訊虢時,轉移控制器 30設定轉移訊號Vs之模式資料MD至中斷輪詢横式,並逐渐 埔加位址資料AD之高階位元之一半(亦即8-位元位址資料 AD之四高階位元)。然後傳輪轉移訊號Vs。在棋式資料MD 予Μ設定至中斷輪詢模式之轉移訊號Vs之四高階位元位址 資料AD與分配至操作端子3ί之四高階位元位址之間存在匹 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準<CNS)A4規格<210 X 297公釐) — — — — 1 — — ·1111111 ^-------— (諝先閲讀背面之注項再填寫本頁) 4350 49 A7 .__B7 五、發明說明(4) 配時,已發出中斷訊號之操作端子31’在訊號返回期間WT 使位址資料AD之低階位元返回至轉移控制器30。如K上所 述,由於轉移控制器30M16端子之單位搜尋已產生中斷訊 號之操作端子31,故可在比較短之時間期間發現操作端子 31 〇 在獲取已產生中斷訊號之操作端子31之位址時,轉移控 制器30設定轉移訊號Vs之模式資料MD至監視模式,並且發 出其位址資料AD匹K如此所獲得位址之轉移訊號至訊虢線 響應轉移訊號Vs,操作端子31在訊號返回期間WT使予 Μ傳輪之資訊返回。最後,轉移控制器30發出一訊號,供 指令中斷重設至已產生中斷訊號之操作端子31,因此清除 設定在操作端子31之中》旗檷。如以上所述,資訊自操作 端子31傳輸至轉移控制器30,係自轉移控制器30傳输訊號 (一虚擬横式訊號,一中斷輪詢模式訊號,一監視模式訊 號,及一中醱重設訊號)至搡作皤子31四次所完成。在轉 移控制器30試園確定希望之控制端子32之搡作狀態時,將 爾要僅傳输其模式資料 HD予Μ設定至監視資科之轉移訊 .號。 由於作動任一開鼷Sa至Sc而產生搡作資料時,操作端子 31使搡作資料返回至轉移控制器30。轉移控制器30傳輸一 轉移訊號至控制蟠子32*其包括依據搡作資料所產生之控 制資料。在收到轉移訊號時,控制端子32控制一照明負載 。此時,控制端子32使監視資料返回至轉移控制器30*並 且如此返回之監視資科另予以傳輪至搡作端子31。響應監 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) _ 7 _ -— — — II — 1 — — ^ — — (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ,裝 ----訂---------線:*"y 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 ____B7__ 五、發明說明(5) 視資料,操作端子31輸出一監視訊號,其通常用Μ照明或 熄滅一操作燈。 圖8中所示之操作端子31,係供變暗目的,並指令照明 負載輸却光。在開始壓下開關Sb或Sc之時刻,及在開關釋 放之時刻,操作端子31傳_操作資訊至轉移控制器30。例 如•如圖10中所示,一供指令照明負載開始增加光輸出之 強度之操作訊號0P1,傳輸至轉移控制器30。一對應於操 作訊號OP1之控制訊號Ch傳輸至控制端子32。在使用者釋 放開闞Sb後,一供停止光輸出強度改變之操作訊號0P2傳 輸至轉移控制器30。一對應於操作訊號0P2之控制訊號CNZ 傳輸至控制端子32。操作訊號OP 1及0P2 * K及控制訊號 Chi CH2藉轉移訊號予Μ傅輸。 在此型之遙控監視糸統,在操作端子31之位址與控制端 子32之位址間之對應,係藉轉移控制器30予Μ管理。可 建立單一操作端子31之位址與許多控制端子32之位址間對 應,Μ及單一操作端子31之位址與單一操作端子32之位址 間之對應。如果單一操作端子之位址予以配置為致使對應 於許多控制端子32之位址,一單一組開關Sa至Sc可集體控 制許多照明負載。此型之控制稱為同時控制。同時控制取 二形式;特別是,供使成許多照明負載成相同控制狀態之 同時控制*及供使成許多照明負載成其各別先前指定控制1 狀態之同時控制。 如以上所述,要完成模式控制,在集體操作端子之開關 之位址與許多負載L之位址間之對應,必須予以暫存在轉 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 8 I ) --1 — IMi — I I 訂 i — I I ί .線 c請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ,Λ35049β α7 Β7 五、發明說明(6) 移控制器30。此型之設定操作稱作”模式設定操作”。在下 文,在操作端子所提供,用作集體操作端子’供模式1控制1 目的之開闞,稱作”模式開關”。而且,在操作端子所提供 ,供個別控制目的之開關,稱作”個別開關S〆°供完成組 控制之設定操作,稱作”组設定操作Μ及在操作端子所 提供,用作集體操作端子*供組控制目的之開關’稱作” 組開關”。 自每一照明負載輸出之光之強度*可藉作動分配至照明 負載之開關Sa至Sc予Μ調整。存在略微熠加或減少整個照 明空藺之光輸出強度(亦即光亮度)之要求。此種要求可通 過組控制控制許多照明負載予Μ滿足。 如Κ上所逑,每一操作端子31及每一控制端子32’各予 Μ分配一個別位址。完成姐控制僅需要建立單一操作端子 31之位址與許多控制端子32之位址間之對應。如圈11中所 示,操作端子31a各與控制端子32關瞄成一種一對一關係 *及一操作端子31b與許多控制端子32鼸聯成一種一對很 多關係。在作動操作端子31b之開關Sa時,操作訊號0P1傳 輪至轉移控制器30·其中顒序產生許多控制訊號CH11至 CK13。如此所產生之控制訊號CN11至CN13,另予以_序傳 輸至將行予K控制之控制端子32。同樣*在作動操作端子 31b之開關Sb時*操作訊號0P2傳輪至轉移控制器30*其中 順序產生許多控制訊號CN21至CN23。如此所產生之控制訊 號CH21至CH23另予Μ順序傅输至將行予Μ控制之控制端子 32。通過此等程序,連接至將行受到組控制之控制端子32 I — I---1---5---I --------訂--------- <請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準<CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) Θ _ η - 435049- A7 B7 可K 一種集體方式 控制之控制端子3ί 各別控制端子32。 之定時* 一控制端 受到組控制之控制 至S c之操作資訊之 *俾增加自照明負 在壓下開關Sb後, 輸出光之強度。然 時間滯後之後,增 光之強度。使用者 1 2中所示*可想像 許多照明器具33與 照明負載。此種構 ,集體控制許多照 度。 滅狀態予Μ照明時 如在夜間突然予Μ 加沉重負載。 系統,有時採用一 對應於一配備有許 有五或更多操作區 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閲讀背面之注惠事項再填寫本頁) 五、發明說明(7) 之許多照明負載, 至S c予Μ控制。 關於將行受到組 資訊,順序傳輪至 33至Sc之操作資訊 。特別是,在將行 ,接收關於開關Sa ,開關Sb予Μ切換 在此情肜,可緊接 端子32之照明負載 Κ切換之時間一段 32之照明負載輸出 為陌生。 對照而言*如圖 關Sa至Sc,藉連接 聯*集體控制許多 一組之開關Sa至Sc 控制照明負載之亮 照明負載為在熄 亮度之情況下,諸 耀眼,從而對眼施 此型之遙控監視 裝置。選擇器開關 置,並且通常配備 •藉作動任一開關Sa 之開關Sa至Sc之操作 因此,接收闞於開闞 子32至另一有所不同 端子32之數大之情形 定時顧著變化。例如 載輸出之光之強度。 增加自連接至一控制 而,可在自開關Sb予 加自連接至另一端子 可認為此種時間滯後 通過使用一單一組開 一單一控制端子32並 形使能通過使用一單 明負載*但不能個別 ,如果負載在有低光 照明*使用者可能被 種稱為選擇器開關之 多操作端子之單一裝 段。只要操作區段通 10 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 435049、 A7 _____B7___五、發明說明(8) 過使用一特殊別設計之位址設定裝置予Μ分配各別位址, 可使用每一操作區段作為個別開醑,模式開關,及一組開 關之任何者。許多個別開闞,模式開關,及組開關,可予 Μ組裝為一單一装置。因之•也提供一選擇器開關,其可 配置横式開關及組開闞,致使對應於許多負載L(從而使用 個別開闞可規定將行予Μ控制之負載L),藉Μ完成模式及 組設定操作。 如Κ上所述,在習知現有選擇器開關,操作區段通過使 用應客戶所設計之位址設定裝置予Μ分配各別位址。因之 ,在維持分配一位址至操作區段或改變操作區段之位址時 ,需要與選擇器開W單獨提供位址設定裝置,因此導入不 方便之要素。 儘管選揮器開闞為一較大型裝置,但選擇器開關僅有有 限之功能,諸如搡作個別開鼷•棋式開鼷,及組開關之功 能;模式設定功能及組設定功能。S擇器開關不具有 完成闞於變暗之控制及設定搡作之任何功能,並且因而相 對於所佔用空間之1,功能之數小。 在混合包含個別開闞及組開闞之遙控監視系統,一種通 過使用指示燈指示負載32之操作之方法,包括一種適合現 場操作之操作狀態顯示方法,及一種遛合自一遠程位置諸 如建築物之監視室監視任令未熄滅之負載(在下文稱作"未 熄滅負載”)之監視狀態顧示方法。根據操作狀態顯示方法 *即使在負載33已通過使用組開闞受到組控制後*在該組 內之有些負載31之狀態*藉個別開Μ予Μ改變時,在組控 -----------Τ--^裝 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ϋ n n n I n n 線 y 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉 11 A7 4 3 5 0 4 9、 __B7__ 五、發明說明(3) 制後也保持在指示燈所顯示之狀態。例如,如圖13中所示 ,首先所有負載33均被中斷,並且因而所有指示燈也被熄 馘U)。在藉個別開關U)啟動負載33之一時,一指示燈 (1)被照明(0)。然而*驵開關之指示燈仍然保持熄滅(X) 。其次,所有其餘負載31 被個別開闞(2)及(3)啟動,因 而個別開關(2)及(3)之指示燈被照明(〇)。由於在該組内 之所有負載31被啟動,組開關之指示燈也被照明(〇)°即 使在此狀態使用個別開關(1)僅中斷負載33之一 *也僅個 別開闞(1)之指示燈被熄滅(X)。.然而,組開關之指示燈仍 然保持照明(0)。其餘負載33被涸別開腿(2)及(3)中斷, 因而所有負載33被中斷。因此,組開關之指示燈也被熄滅 (X)。指示燈之照明(〇)示負載之啟動’及負載之消光(X) 示負載之中斷。 對照而言,根據監視狀態顯示方法’在啟動該組内之甚 至負載33之一時,組開關之指示燈也被照明(〇)。例如, 如圖14中所示,首先所有負載33被中斷,並且組開關之指 示燈也被熄滅(X)。在此狀態*在個別開關(1)啟動負載33 之一時,個別開翻U)之指示燈被照明(0)。而且*此時, 組開闊之指示燈也被照明(0)。個別開闞(2)及(3)啟動其 餘負載33,個別開關(2)及(3)之指示燈也被照明(0),並 且組開關之指示燈保持照明(0)。個別開關(2)及(3)中u 其餘負載33,因而所有負載33被中斷,並且組開闞之指$ 燈也被熄滅U)。監視狀態顯示方法有效供監視每一樓面 之每一區域内,或每一分隔隔間内之未熄滅負載33。只要 1---------J------I-----訂--------- {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製435 0 4 9 ^ A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (]) Jingbei Mingfa's hair system is based on monitoring and monitoring of remote species. 1 It is related to Mingyi hair technology, this phaser, drawing control, such as transformation and transformation. Including the package system 1 糸 For inspection and promotion, the accused should be far away. Xi Tong is the remote monitoring and control station of the telemonitoring station, and then connects to the first line and the signal line S AN No. 2 of the 3 control system. M to the S line signal line & &, M Ranyu 2 turn 3 . The sub-32 terminal controls one control and one 31 and sub 31 terminals for terminal operation. It can be operated from one to a single connection. There are a few consecutive examples. There are a few examples. * And the example of Example 31 shows how many examples are performed * It is very up-to-date. FI S Real L ’Line LS No. Line Signal to Signal Connected to Connected Can Connect 32-End Lighting Controlled to Photo Controlled by or Provided by 32 and Controlled by Parallel Control-Provided by 32-controller. The ultimate human system is strong and controlled, and the light can be connected, and the Μ loser is loaded with light 33 negative minus the specified device. The brightness is clear. The finger is loaded with 32 minus negatives. The negative light of the carrier lamp is less bright than the fluorescent light. The 33-inch vehicle lamp negative device is bright and bright, and the negative load is 3 and the photon M is given to the control device. Control light CO to reduce the device into the device (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Binding · Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, or printed by the consumer co-operative party to increase the number of orders Λ and 32 * The sub-end fingering system has less control, decreases the time or makes the decrement increase by the increase K, the intensity of the light intensity, the light output is less, and the time is reduced, and the order is the change of the loss. The lithography of light intensity is at your fingertips. When the degree is strong, the output is guaranteed to be changed. The 32-photon variable-end restructuring-control mode, the strong output of the variable-reform output light is turned on, which is the second type when the parameter is controlled. The change in output when the intensity is 0 degrees is changed. The change in intensity is caused by the second loss. 32 The photon finger is only completed and controlled, and the paper size of M in this period is applicable to Chinese national standards. (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 4 / 'Α7 Β7 The terminal printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is called a self-operating terminal, or the lighting negative κ, and the start and start and stop and increase operation terminals Address * Transfer signal for transfer transfer control (24V) * Contains the measured transmission error of the molded terminal 3 2 of the signal Vs 31 or the control return period WT. . During the transfer of each operation, the control data number is returned by using the appropriate number). V. Description of the invention (2) Terminal of main dimmer. 31 is equipped with three-push type switches Sa to Sc. The extinction * of the switch Sa command photo and the switch Sb command increase the intensity of the light output and stop increasing. The switch Sc command reduces the intensity of the light output, and M does not decrease. The user depresses the switches Sb and Sc * and starts to disappear | and the user releases the two switches * to stop these operations. 31 and the control terminal 32 are provided with individual addresses. By using these controllers 30, individual operation terminals 31 and control terminals 32 are sensed. The device 30 sends a signal Vs having a format shown in FIG. 9A through the signal line Ls *. The transfer signal Vs is a bipolar time-division multiplexing signal (soil—synchronous signal SY indicating the beginning of signal transmission; indicating horizontal data HD of the transfer type; for individually calling the operation terminal 31 and the control address information section AD; for controlling the load Control data CD of L: Inspection for inspection and CS CS; K and a signal return data used as a time slot for receiving a signal (monitoring data) returned from the terminal 32 of the operation terminal are transferred to the M transfer by the punch width (See Figure 9B) As terminal 31 and control terminal 32, if the address data AD sent from the signal line Ls to the signal Vs matches a preset address CD, the self-transfer signal Vs is intercepted. During the transfer signal VS message WT, monitoring data is returned as the current mode signal (that is, when the low-resistance tool makes the signal line Ls short-circuited, the transmitted signal transmits data to the desired operation terminal 31 and control terminal 32 in the transfer controller 30 Once, the mode data of the transfer signal Vs is set to the control mode. The paper size applies to the national standard of China (CNS) A4 (210 X297 mm). 1 --- I nl—411 i -111 II — Order --- I I ---- 4 (Please read the notes on the back before (Write this page) 5 435049 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (3), and the address data AD of the transfer signal Vs is set to the address of the operation terminal 31 or control terminal 32. Pass The signal line Ls sends the transfer signal Vs set in this way, and the address matches the transfer signal Vs. The operation terminal 31 or the control terminal 32 of the asset AD receives the control data CD. During the signal return period ^ 'the terminal that has received the control data makes Monitoring data return. According to the relationship between the control data CD transmitted by the WT self-transfer controller 30 and the received monitoring data during the signal return period, the transfer controller 30 can determine whether the control data CD has been transmitted to the desired operation terminal 31 or control Terminal 32. When the control terminal 32 receives the control data CD, the control terminal 32 outputs a load control signal * for controlling the load L according to the control data CD. When the operation terminal 31 receives the mined data CD, the operation terminal 31 outputs a monitor The signal * is used to control the operation of the control data CD and instruct the load L. The transfer controller 30 usually transmits a pattern data at a predetermined time interval. It is expected that the transfer signal Vs * set by HD to K to the virtual mode and the address data AD to K are changed cyclically (that is, a full-time polling operation). When the operation terminal 31 sends out any information to the transfer controller 30, It is synchronized with the synchronization signal SY of the transfer signal VS in the virtual mode, and generates an interrupt signal such as that shown in FIG. 9C. At this time, the operation terminal 31 sets an interrupt flag to prepare for the brewing of the transfer controller 30 After the information exchange. When receiving the interruption signal, the transfer controller 30 sets the mode data MD of the transfer signal Vs to the interrupt polling horizontal mode, and gradually adds half of the higher-order bits of the address data AD (that is, 8- Bit address data AD four higher order bits). Then pass the transfer signal Vs. There is a paper between the chessboard data MD and M set to the interrupt polling mode of the fourth high-order bit address data AD and the fourth high-order bit address allocated to the operation terminal 3ί. The paper size is applicable to Chinese national standards < CNS) A4 specifications < 210 X 297 mm) — — — — 1 — — · 1111111 ^ -------— (谞 Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 4350 49 A7 .__ B7 V. Description of the invention (4) When dispatched, the operation terminal 31 'that has issued an interrupt signal returns the lower order bits of the address data AD to the transfer controller 30 during the signal return period. As mentioned in K, since the unit of the transfer controller 30M16 terminal searches for the operation terminal 31 that has generated an interrupt signal, the operation terminal 31 can be found in a relatively short period of time. 〇 The address of the operation terminal 31 that has generated an interrupt signal is obtained At this time, the transfer controller 30 sets the mode data MD of the transfer signal Vs to the monitoring mode, and sends its address data AD to the transfer signal of the address thus obtained to the signal line to respond to the transfer signal Vs. During the period, WT returns the information to M. Finally, the transfer controller 30 sends a signal for instructing the interruption to reset to the operation terminal 31 that has generated the interruption signal, so the flag set in the operation terminal 31 is cleared. As described above, the information is transmitted from the operation terminal 31 to the transfer controller 30, which is a signal transmitted from the transfer controller 30 (a virtual horizontal signal, an interrupt polling mode signal, a monitoring mode signal, and a heavy signal). Set the signal) to 搡 作 皤 子 31 four times. When the transfer controller 30 tests the garden to determine the desired operating state of the control terminal 32, it will transmit only its mode data HD to M to the transfer signal of the monitoring asset. When operation data is generated by operating any of the openings Sa to Sc, the operation terminal 31 returns the operation data to the transfer controller 30. The transfer controller 30 transmits a transfer signal to the control unit 32 *, which includes control data generated based on the operation data. When receiving the transfer signal, the control terminal 32 controls a lighting load. At this time, the control terminal 32 returns the monitoring data to the transfer controller 30 *, and the monitoring information section thus returned is passed to the operation terminal 31 in turn. The paper size of this paper is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) _ 7 _-— — — II — 1 — — ^ — — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page), Binding ---- Order --------- Line: * " y Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Employee Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed A7 ____B7__ V. Description of Invention (5 ) Depending on the data, the operation terminal 31 outputs a monitoring signal, which is usually illuminated or turned off by an operation lamp. The operation terminal 31 shown in FIG. 8 is provided for the purpose of dimming and instructs the lighting load to lose light. At the moment when the switch Sb or Sc is started to be depressed, and at the moment when the switch is released, the operation terminal 31 transmits operation information to the transfer controller 30. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, an operation signal 0P1 for instructing the lighting load to start increasing the intensity of light output is transmitted to the transfer controller 30. A control signal Ch corresponding to the operation signal OP1 is transmitted to the control terminal 32. After the user releases 阚 Sb, an operation signal OP2 for stopping the light output intensity change is transmitted to the transfer controller 30. A control signal CNZ corresponding to the operation signal 0P2 is transmitted to the control terminal 32. The operation signals OP 1 and 0P2 * K and the control signal Chi CH2 transfer the signal to the M-Fu input. In this type of remote monitoring system, the correspondence between the address of the operation terminal 31 and the address of the control terminal 32 is managed by the transfer controller 30. Correspondence can be established between the addresses of the single operation terminal 31 and the addresses of many control terminals 32, and the correspondence between the addresses of M and the single operation terminal 31 and the addresses of the single operation terminal 32. If the addresses of a single operation terminal are configured so as to correspond to the addresses of many control terminals 32, a single set of switches Sa to Sc can collectively control many lighting loads. This type of control is called simultaneous control. Simultaneous control takes two forms; in particular, simultaneous control for making many lighting loads into the same control state * and simultaneous control for making many lighting loads into their respective previously designated control 1 states. As mentioned above, in order to complete the mode control, the correspondence between the addresses of the switches of the collective operation terminals and the addresses of many loads L must be temporarily transferred. This paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 8 I) --1 — IMi — II Order i — II ί. Line c Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Λ35049β α7 Β7 V. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION (6) Move the controller 30. This type of setting operation is called "mode setting operation". In the following, provided at the operation terminal, it is used as a collective operation terminal for the opening and closing of mode 1 control 1 purpose, and is called "mode switch". In addition, the switches provided at the operation terminals for individual control purposes are called "individual switches S 开关 ° for setting operation of group control, called" group setting operation M "and provided at the operation terminals for collective operation terminals. * The switch for group control purpose is called "group switch". The intensity of light output from each lighting load * can be adjusted by actuating switches Sa to Sc assigned to the lighting load. There is a requirement to slightly increase or decrease the light output intensity (ie, brightness) of the entire lighting space. This requirement can be met by controlling many lighting loads through group control. As shown in K, each operation terminal 31 and each control terminal 32 'are assigned a different address to each M. To complete the sister control, it is only necessary to establish the correspondence between the addresses of a single operation terminal 31 and the addresses of many control terminals 32. As shown in circle 11, each of the operation terminals 31a and the control terminals 32 are in a one-to-one relationship *, and an operation terminal 31b is coupled to many control terminals 32 in a one-to-many relationship. When the switch Sa of the operation terminal 31b is actuated, the operation signal OP1 is transmitted to the transfer controller 30. Among them, many control signals CH11 to CK13 are sequentially generated. The control signals CN11 to CN13 thus generated are transmitted in sequence to the control terminal 32 to be controlled by K. Similarly * when the switch Sb of the operation terminal 31b is actuated * the operation signal 0P2 is transmitted to the transfer controller 30 *, among which many control signals CN21 to CN23 are sequentially generated. The control signals CH21 to CH23 thus generated are additionally output to the M sequence control terminal 32 to be controlled by the M sequence. Through these procedures, connect to the control terminal 32 which will be controlled by the group I — I --- 1 --- 5 --- I -------- Order --------- < Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standards < CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) Θ _ η-435049- A7 B7 Control terminals that can be controlled in a collective manner 3ί Individual control terminals 32. Timing * A control end is controlled by the group control to the operation information of S c * 俾 Increase the self-lighting negative After pressing the switch Sb, the intensity of the output light is output. However, after a time lag, the intensity of the increase. As shown in user 1 2 *, many lighting fixtures 33 and lighting loads can be imagined. With this structure, many illuminances are collectively controlled. In the off state, when the M is illuminated, a sudden heavy load is applied to the M at night. The system is sometimes printed with a consumer co-op corresponding to an employee with a five or more operating area, equipped with the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the note on the back before filling out this page). 5. Description of the invention (7) Many lighting loads are controlled by SC. Regarding the group receiving information, the operation information is sequentially transferred to 33 to Sc. In particular, when the switch Sa and the switch Sb are switched in the line, in this case, the lighting load output of terminal 32 for a period of time immediately after the switching of κ is unknown. In contrast, * as shown in Figures Sa to Sc, through the connection * collectively control a group of switches Sa to Sc to control the bright load of the lighting load in the case of extinction of brightness, so that this type of eyes Remote monitoring device. The selector switch is set and is usually equipped with the operation of the switches Sa to Sc by actuating any of the switches Sa. Therefore, the receiver 32 varies from the opener 32 to another terminal 32. The timing is subject to change. For example, the intensity of light output. The increase of self-connected to a control can be added to the self-connected to another terminal from the switch Sb. Such a time lag can be considered by using a single group to open a single control terminal 32 and form enabled by using a single load It cannot be individual. If the load is in low-light illumination *, the user may be a single installation of multiple operating terminals called selector switches. As long as the operating section passes 10 paper sizes, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) applies. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 435049, A7 _____B7___ V. Description of the invention (8) The specially designed address setting device assigns individual addresses to M, and each operating section can be used as any of the individual switches, mode switches, and a group of switches. Many individual switches, mode switches, and group switches can be assembled into a single device. Therefore, a selector switch is also provided, which can be configured with a horizontal switch and a group switch, so that it corresponds to many loads L (thus the use of individual switches can specify the load L to be controlled by M). Group setting operation. As described above, in the conventional selector switch, the operation section allocates individual addresses to M by using an address setting device designed by the customer. Therefore, when maintaining the allocation of an address to the operation section or changing the address of the operation section, an address setting device needs to be provided separately from the selector, so it is inconvenient to introduce the elements. Although the selector switch is a larger device, the selector switch has only limited functions, such as the function of individual switch • chess switch, and the function of the group switch; mode setting function and group setting function. The S selector switch does not have any function to complete the control and setting operations for dimming, and therefore the number of functions is small compared to 1 of the occupied space. In the mixed remote control monitoring system including individual switches and group switches, a method of indicating the operation of the load 32 by using an indicator light, including a method for displaying operation status suitable for field operation, and a method for integrating from a remote location such as a building The monitoring room of the monitoring room monitors the order of the unextinguished load (hereinafter referred to as " non-extinguished load ") to monitor the monitoring status. According to the operating status display method * even after the load 33 has been controlled by the group through the use of the group switch * In the group, the status of some loads 31 * When you change by individual opening M to M, install in the group control ---------- T-^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) ϋ nnn I nn line y This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm> 11 A7 4 3 5 0 4 9. __B7__ V. Description of the invention (3) Keep the instructions after the system The state displayed by the lamp. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, first all the loads 33 are interrupted, and therefore all the indicators are also turned off. U) When one of the loads 33 is activated by an individual switch U), an indicator (1) illuminated (0). However * 驵 开The indicator lights remain off (X). Secondly, all the remaining loads 31 are turned on individually (2) and (3), so the indicators of the individual switches (2) and (3) are illuminated (0). All loads 31 in this group are activated, and the indicators of the group switches are illuminated (0) ° Even if an individual switch is used in this state (1) only one of the loads 33 is interrupted *, only the indicators of the individual switches (1) are turned on It is extinguished (X). However, the group switch indicator remains illuminated (0). The remaining loads 33 are interrupted by the open legs (2) and (3), so all loads 33 are interrupted. Therefore, the group switch The indicator light is also extinguished (X). The lighting of the indicator light (〇) indicates the load's start-up and the load's extinction (X) indicates the load's interruption. In contrast, according to the monitoring status display method ' When one of the loads 33, the group switch indicators are also illuminated (0). For example, as shown in FIG. 14, first all the loads 33 are interrupted, and the group switches indicators are also turned off (X). In this state * When the individual switch (1) starts one of the loads 33, the indicator light is turned on individually. Illumination (0). And * At this time, the open indicator of the group is also illuminated (0). Individual openings (2) and (3) start the remaining load 33, and the indicators of individual switches (2) and (3) are also Is illuminated (0), and the indicators of the group switches remain illuminated (0). The remaining loads 33 in the individual switches (2) and (3) are interrupted, and all loads 33 are interrupted, and the group switch $ Off U). The monitoring status display method is effective for monitoring the unextinguished load in each area of each floor or in each compartment. As long as 1 --------- J ---- --I ----- Order --------- {Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) j〇 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(10) (請先閱讀背面之注意"項再填寫本頁) 每一區域予K劃分為數組1即使在一組中僅負載33之一為 在啟動狀態時,組開關之指示燈也被照明。該組之指示燈 僅在所有負載33中斷時熄滅。因此,可自一遠程位置,諸 如一監梘室,監視未熄滅負載33。負載33之狀態之指示可 藉由一通訊介面端子或一觸點介面端子f予以輸出至一外 部裝置*諸如一中心監視器儀表板。 在個別開關或組開關在每一區域内作動(或局部作動)之 情形,根據操作狀態顯示方法,在均為在熄滅狀態之負載 33之一 *如圖15中所示,藉個別開關(1)予K啟動時*組 開關之指示燈保持熄滅。如果組開關在此狀態予以作動> 所有負載33均被啟動,结果為指示燈之顯示匹配實際操作 狀態。因此,自然操作變為可行。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制衣 對照而言,根據監視狀態顧示方法,即使在如圖16中所 示,僅啟動負載33之一時,組開關之指示燈也被照明。如 果此時啟動組開關,所有負載33均中斷。儘管試圖啟動所 有負載33,但除非中斷所有負載33*並再次啟動組開關, 負載33無法予以啟動。指示燈之顯示不匹配霣際操作*因 此導致不自然操作。 如果所有諸組之操作端子31均予K設定至操作狀態顯示 方法,此種方法適合局部操作,但無法使用供在中心之監 視。即使在此情形*只要利用操作端子之指示燈供模式控 制目的*便可實現監視功能。如果試圖通過使用一種模式 *控制在一區域內之啟動/中斷負載,必須採用二模式開 關*因此導致必要大量之模式電路(第一問題)。對照而言 13 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) Α7 Β7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(π ,如果操作端子31予Μ設定至監視狀態顯示方法,局部操 作變為不自然。儘管在中心通遴使用多工傅輸方法,監視 局部操作,也無法解決上述問題。 在上述遙控監視糸統,可能有單一控制端子32予以分配 至許多組之情形。在此種系統*如圖17中所示,如果作動 一組之一組開關,不論負載之狀態,組Α内之所有負載被 同時中斷 (X)。在辦公室具有較大樓面空間之情形,合宜 之措施可為將辦公室剿分為若干區段*並對諸區段分配諸 組。照明負載之啟動或中斷依一種每組基礎予Μ控制。在 此種情形,如果某一組之照明負載中斷,在相鄰組(區段) 下面之區域也略微變暗。在相鄰組下面之區域防止光亮度 之此種減少,一棰可想像之措施,如圖18中所示,包含分 配位於諸區段間之重叠之照明負載至組Α及Β。因此,即使 組A之照明負載中斷,包括在數組A及B之照明負載也不中 斷。此種控制方法稱為ON-優先化控制方法,及常實施之 控制方法稱為稍後操作優先化控制方法。 然而* ON-優先化控制方法涉及下列問題。例如,如圖 19中所示,無法同時使用包含諸區段之組B,及供監視整 個樓面包括組B之組A。更特別是,作動對應於局部組B之 組開關,無法中斷包括在組B之負載。在最初,作動對懕 於整個組A之組開關,藉以中斷包括在組A,並且不屬於組 B之負載。随後,作動對應於組B之組開關,藉Μ中斷屬於 組Β之負載。 如圖20Α至20Ε中所示,在許多局部組D及Ε予Μ設定在一 本紙張尺度適用_國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 14 ---------J---T --------訂---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 350 4 A7 _ _ B7____ 五、發明說明(12) 大組C内之情形,每一負載靥於至少組C至E之一。在啟動 所有負載之情形,作動對應於組C至E之任何組之組開關, 無負載可被中斷。為防止此種情況,如圖20B中所示,在 各別諸組C至E提供不羼於諸組之任何組之個別虛擬開關K1 至K3,並且每一虛擬開關K1至K3在作動對懕組開翮時被中 斷。如圖20C至20E中所示,組開關之指示燈可被熄滅(因 為在該組存在中斷之負載)。然而,必須K等於組數之數 量提供原來不需要之虚擬控制電路*因此增加設備成本U 在一棰諸如先前所述者之遙控監視糸統*各種功能係藉 轉移控制器1與各種端子之組合所實現。然而,在很多情 形|新功能被加至轉移控制器,並且年年實現與改進醑聯 之端子。而且* 一種功能擴充之轉移控制器可與一種新發 展成功具有新功能之端子連接。在此等情況下,可將一種 舊型缺少新功能之轉移控制器連接至一有新功能之新端子 。按照目前情況,端子未設有裝置,供可靠檢査轉移控制 器之功能之型式。II轉移控制器在最壊情形可能使整個遙 控監視糸統不操作,並且無論如何可不利用一新功能。 即使在端子設定各種資料(諸如組及模式資料)*但因為型 式失配,資料也無法發出至轉移控制器,因此使設定操作 無用。 發明之概述 本發明業經按照上述問題予以想像,並且本發明之目的 為提供一種遙控監視系統,能同時啟動將行受到組控制之 許多照明負載,而不涉及時間滯後。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS〉A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -15 - (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) n ϋ I I n n n n n I I -t A】 ο Ί 494 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(】3) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本發明之另一目的為提供一種遙控監視為統*能減少光 輸出強度之突然改變否則將會導致在眼所施加之負載,並 使能根據環境之精心減光器控制。 本發明業經鑑於在相關技藝之上述缺點予Μ想像,並且 本發明之目的為提供一種遙控監視系統,其需要較小佔用 空間,並且其使用多功能設定操作端子|能提供設定*控 制,及管理所需要之各種功能*藉以達成多功能性能*並 改進成本效益。 本發明之目的為提供一種顯示器 *可根據操作端子之 使用目的予以選擇,並方便糸統構形。 本發明之目的為提供一遙控監視系統,防止型式失配否 則將會導致之種種問題•諸如不合格操作。因此,本發明 具有提供能改進遙控監視系統之可操作性之優點。 為達成上逑種棰目的*根據本發明之第一態樣,提供一 種遙控監視糸統包括: 許多操作端子及控制端子,其各予Μ分配位址; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 一訊號線*操作端子及控制端子通過多點連接予Κ連接 至此訊號線; 一轉移控制器,連接至訊號線; 照明負載,連接至各別控制端子;Μ及 一操作區段,’提供在每一操作端子,其中轉移訊號在轉 移控制器與每一操作及控制端子之間,藉時分多工方法予 Μ交換*及一包括資料對應於操作端子操作區段之操作之 轉移訊號予Κ傳輸至由在轉移控制器所設定之位址間之對 16 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 4350 _B7_ 五、發明說明(U) 應所規定之控制端子*藉κ控制連接至轉移控制器之照明 負載,提供遙控監視糸統,其中* 對應包括一種個別控制關係,供使一操作區段與一照明 負載關聯,及一同時控制關係,供使一操作區段與許多照 明負載關聯; 控制端子包括一個別位址設定區段*供設定一獨特之個 別位址至許多控制之每一端子,及一同時控制位址設定區 段,供設定一共同分配至許多控制端子之同時控制位址; Μ及 每一控制端子設有一端子處理區段,其在端子處理區段 藉轉移訊號被指令使用個別位址*及包括在轉移訊號之位 址資科匹配設定在個別位址設定區段之個別位址時;或在 端子處理區段藉轉移訊號被指令同時使用控制位址,及包 括在轉移訊號之位址資料匹配設定在同時控制位址設定區 段之同時控制位址畤,控制照明負載之強度至一由操作端 子之操作區段所指令之減光器水準。除了外個別位址,每 一控制端子予Μ分配一同時控制位址,並且同時控制位址 予以共同分配至許多控制端子。因此,分配相同同時控制 位址之控制端子實際同時接收相同轉移訊號,因此使能在 簧際相同時間控制照明負載之強度。因此,根據本發明之 遙控監視系統產生能改變許多成組照明負載之強度,而不 涉及時間滯後之優點。而且,使用個別位址使能個別控制 照明負載。雖然照明負載予以控制個別,但在照明負載予 以成組時,便同時改變照明負載之強度,因此防止發生使 紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -\1 ~ ------I--J----- ----I i I I ^---------J (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 435049^ A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(ί 5 ) 用者將會認為陌生之時間滯後。 根據本發明之第二態樣,另提供如在第一態樣所界定之 遙控監視系統*其中同時控制位址設定區段可設定許多同 時控制位址。因此*可在許多組當中共用一單一照明負載 。例如*在將行受到組控制之照明器具*依一設有許多照 明器具之房間是否分隔為隔間,而予以改變之情形,一單 一照明器具屬於在房間分隔時所界定之一組,以及屬於在 房間未分隔時所界定之另一組。遙控監視系統可容易Μ — 種重《方式設定每一照明器具至數組。 根據本發明之第三態樣,另提供如在第三態樣所界定之 遙控監視糸統,其中轉移控制器藉由訊號線設定一周時控 制位址在每一控制端子之同時控制位址設定區段。同時控 制位址可通過使用訊號線分配至每一控制端子。因之,在 一同時控制位址分配至每一控制端子時*使用者不必去至 每一控制端子,因此方便分配一同時控制位址至控制端子 之揲作。 根據本發明之第四態樣,另提供如在第三態樣所界定之 遙控監視系統*其中轉移控制器設定一在改變個別位址之 控制端子之情形*依據在改變後個別位址所獲得之新同時 控制位址·至任何控制端子之同時控制位址設定區段。即 使在時由於改變個別位址之各別控制端子發生必要設定一 新同時控制位址時,使用者也不必去至每一控制端子*因 此方便分配同時控制位址至控制端子之操作。 根據本發明之第五態樣*另提供如在第三態樣所界定之 紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ~ 1 8 ~ -----------„----裝--------訂---------線 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員Η消費合作社印製 435049- A7 _ B7 _ 五、發明說明(Η;) 遙控監視糸統,其中轉移控制器包含裝置,供檢査同時控 制位址傳輸至控制端子是否匹配設定在控制端子之同時控 制位址設定區段,並藉轉移訊號自控制端子返回之同時控 制位址。遙控監梘糸統可防止否則雜訊將會導之傳輸不正 確同時控制位址至控制端子。 根據本發明之第六態樣,另提供如在第三態樣所界定之 遙控監視系統*其中轉移控制器包含裝置,供在啟動系統 時,檢査設定在每一控制鏞子之同時控制位址設定區段之 同時控制位址* Μ及供設定一正確同時控制位址至同時控 制位址不同於將行予Κ設定之同時控制之控制端子。例如 ,即使遙控監視糸統鼸閉(例如在停電時),在完成同時控 制位址予Μ分配至控制端子前,在遙控監視系統啟動時, 一正確同時控制位址被分Κ至各別控制端子,藉Μ使組減 光器能如預計操作。 根據本發明之第七態樣,另提供如在第一至第六態樣所 界定之遙控監視系統,其中控制器端子钽含一顯示區段, 供指示照明負載之減光器水準;Μ及轉移控制器顒序輪詢 所有操作及控制端子,藉Μ導致每一控制端子使關於照明 負載之實際減光器水準之監視資料返回;更新依據如此返 回之監視資料將行予Μ指示在操作端子之顯示區段之減光 器水準ί Κ及優先於不藉同時控制與操作區段翮聯之其他 控制端子,輪詢在轉移控制器自操作端子接收轉移訊號時 ,藉同時控制與操作端子之操作區段醏聯之各別控制端子 。即使在許多控制端子通過使用同時控制位址同時變暗時 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 一 19 ----(ϊ Γ I i i i ^ - I I I I I I I --------I I i (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 435049 A7 B7 五、發明說明(丨7) 也防止出琨在每一操作端子之顯示區段之指示自滯後於 載之強度之實際改變,因此實現在顯示區段之指示 涉及否則將會發生*並且使用者將會認為陌生之時 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 照明負 •而不 間滯後 根據 遙控監 至一完 包括同 每一控 載之強 漸改變 將會専 之精心 根據 遙控監 而變化 同時控 改變* 根據 許多操 一訊 至訊號 —•轉 本發明之 視条統, 全相同同 時控制位 制端子之 度。在將 照明負載 致之對眼 控制。 本發明之 視糸統| 之褒減時 制之許多 並致使另 本發明之 作端子及 號線,操 線; 移控制器 第八態樣,另提供如在第一態樣所界定之 其中轉移控制器傳輸一衰減照明負載時間 時控制位址所分配之控制端子,並且在藉 址之轉移訊號接收衰減開始控制資料時| 端子處理區段衰減在衰減時間內之照明負 行受到同時控制之許多組照明負載*可逐 之強度,藉以減輕光強度之急迤改變否則 之負載。而且,可根據環境完成照明強度 第九態樣,另提供如在第八態樣所界定之 其中轉移控制器可傳輸根據同時控制位址 間。可完成照明之精心控制,供將行受到 組照明負載,致使某一組之照明強度迅速 一組之照明強度鍰慢改變。 第十態樣*提供一種遙控監視糸統*包括 控制端子*其各予Μ分配位址; 作端子及控制端子通過多點連接予Μ連接 連接至訊號線; 照明負載連接至各別控制端子;Μ及 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 20 ----------111 1 -------------- 1 I I I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4 35 0 4 9'、 A7 _B7 五、發明說明(18) 一操作區段,提供在每一操作端子,其中轉移訊號在轉 移控制器與每一操作及控制端子之間藉時分多工方法予Μ 交換,及一包括資料對應於操作端子之操作區段之操作之 轉移訊號予以傳輸至通過設定在轉移控制器之位址間之對 應,所規定之控制端子,藉Μ控制連接至轉移控制器之照 明負載*提供遙控監視系統•其中 廚應包括至少一種僱別控制關係*供使一操作區段與一 照明負載闞聯; 控制端子包括一個別位址設定區段,供設定一獨特涸别 位址至許多控制端子之每一端子; 在已傳輸闞於目標減光器水準及衰減光之強度至目標減 光器水準所需要時間之資料至控制端子後,轉移控制器藉 轉移訊號傳輸衰減開始控制資料至控制端子;Κ及 每一控制端子之端子處理區段計算在衰減時間内,衰減 照明負載之強度至目標減光器水準所需要之變暗速率,並 根據接收衰減開始控制資料時之變暗速率*衰減照明負載 之強度至目標減光器水準。由於照明負載之強度可逐漸改 變,故防止照明強度之急达改變否則將會導致之對眼施加 負載*並可根據環境完成照明之精心控制。 根摟本發明之第十一態樣,另提供如在第十態樣所界定 之遙控監視糸統,其中轉移控制器可傳輸根據每一控制端 子而變化之衰減時間。供許多照明負載,可完成照明之精 心控制,致使某些照明負載之強度迅速改變,並致使其他 照明負載之強度媛慢改變。 -21 - !------------裝*-------訂---------據 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 435049 A7 B7 五、發明說明(19) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 定多 同 度所址M減並,區減減時根 界制單 定 界許 共 強址位; 衰,時定衰標同可 所控之 界 所與 一 之位制子 ,率址設收目子而 樣一式 所 樣段 定 光制控端 内速位址接至端因 態每模 樣 態區 設 減控時制 間暗制位段度制並 二據多 態 十作 供 衰時同控 時變控制區強控, 十根許 一 第操 , 及同如別 減之用控理之多變 第輸含。第 在一 段 準一料各 衰要使時處載許改 在傳包制在 如使 區.,水至資至 在需時同子負使浙 如可在控如 供供 定址器料址料 算所同在端明可逐 供器,式供 提一 設位光資位資 計準段配在照中可 提制境模提 另括.,址制減之括制 段水區匹及減其度 另控環心另 ,包係位控搮間包控 區器理料,衰,強 ,移據精, 樣應鼷制時目時藉始 理光處資時,制之。樣轉根成樣 態對制控同於要並開 處減子址址率控載制態中可完態 二中控時之闞需,減 子.標端位位速式負控三其。Μ 四 十其時同子輸所子衰 端g·令之制暗模明式十,間藉十 第,同一端傳準端輪 之至指括控變成照模第統時,第 之統之括制,水制傳 子度號包時之完。心之系減間之 明系聯包控器器控其 端強訊所同時可制精明視衰時明 發視關子多制光多號 制之移號之料。控成發監之減發 本監載端許控減許訊 控載轉訊定m準減完本控化衰本 據控負制至移標之移 一負藉移設g水衰境據遙變變據 根遙明控配轉目配轉 毎明據轉所i器到環根之子改根 之照 分 至分之及 照根在段開光受據 定端位 ----------—^裝--------訂---------線·^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 22 ^35049^ Α7 Β7 -------— — — i — 裝--------訂--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(20 ) 之遙控監視系統,其中操作 關聯負載之操作狀態; 轉移控制器傳輸控制資料 負載之操作狀態,切換在操 及轉移控制器配備有顯示方 示區段之顯示方法,備供操 *可根據操作端子之使用目 統構形。 根據本發明之第十五態樣 之遙控監視系統,其中轉移 ,供設定及檢査供顯示區段 作端子之使用目的,選擇顬 根據本發明之第十六態樣 定之遙控監視,糸統,其中遙 裝置,供根據許多操作端子 性切換負載控制方法。因此 ,選擇顯示方法,並方便系 根據本發明之第十七態樣 之遙控監視系統*其中控制 法,其中,如果在操作區段 至少開關之一予以啟動,負 及一稍後操作優先化控制方 先化,藉μ控制負載。僅在 許多開翮之間共用之負載, 端子包括一顯示區段,供指示 ,供根據自控制端子所獲得之 作端子之顯示區段之指示;Μ 法切換裝置*供選擇性切換顯 作端子之每一操作區段。因此 的,選擇顯示方法,並方便糸 ,提供如在第十四態樣所界定 控制器與一外部裝置交換訊號 之顯示方法。因此•可根據操 示方法,並方便系統構形。 ,另提供如在第十四態樣所界 控監視系統包含控制方法切換 之 操作區段it作涅序*選擇 ,可根據操作端子之使用目的 統構形。 *提供如在第十六態樣所界定 方法包括一 0N-優先化控制方 開闞之間共用負載•及負載藉 載藉另一開關之中斷便無效, 法,供使一稍後作動之開翮優 0N-優先化控制方法所分配之 被自另一開翮之中斷動作排除 23 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4 35 Q 4 9 A7 B7 五、發明說明(21) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 界訊用 界能多在,作優 定之址 轉子 時制實組 所換使 所功許存訊操之 界特位 在端 同控在成 樣交之 樣 之及儲資格性 所獨制 或作 且 時可多 態置子 態子器得式合作 樣所控 ,操 並同並許 。 七裝端 八端制獲型不操 態子時 時, ,一 ,作 形十部作 十及控,之如可 一端同 址時 址同號操 構第外操 第器移號置諸之 第為之 位址 位,訊能 統在一合 在制轉訊裝,統 在一子 別位 制而移有 系如與適。如控有移存題糸 如有端 個制 控因轉具 之供器一形供於設轉儲問視 供子作 配控 時。同明 用提制擇構提闞,由訊之監 提端操 匹時 同子相發 使另控選統 ς 存置藉資致控 另作多 料同 有端收本 易,移。系,儲裝子式導遙 ,操許 資配 子多接 , 容樣轉法便樣供存端型會進 樣一至 址匹 端許時此 種態中方方態中儲或之將改 態每配 位料。 一 至同因 一 八其制 Μ 九其訊器子則能 十中分 之資載每配際。 現十,控藉十,資制端否有 二其同 括址負,分實載 實第統査,第統式控一配具 第,共 包位制外同子負 易之系檢法之糸型移另失明 之統一 所之控址共端制 容明視及方明視之轉或式發 明糸及 號括載位Μ之控 可發監定制發監訊及器型本 發視, 訊包負別予配時 為本控設控本控資 Μ 制止, 本監址 移所一個址分定 果據遙供之據遙式.,控防此 據控位及轉號至了 位所同 結根之,的根之型子移Μ因。根遙別Μ在訊接除制址相 , 定號目 定之端轉藉。點 之個; 移連 控位際 I I — I 11111111^ I I — I — I I ^ « — — — III — — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(22) 負載,而不涉及時間滯後之儍點。而且,如果使用個別位 址*負載可予Μ個別控制。因此,如果個別負載希望予以 成組,同時予以控制*其予Μ同峙控制,藉以防止發生使 用者將會認為陌生之時間滯後。 根據本發明之第二十一態樣*提供如在第二十態樣所界 定之遙控監視系統,其中操作端子設有位址設定記憶體, 其中位元位置與單一位址關聯。一位址旗標予以設定在位 址設定記憶體任何位元位置 > 及使用對應於位元位置之位 址作為操作端子之位址。在設运許多位址時,可減低記憶 體容量,因..此使能成本減低。而且,可縮短設定位址所需 要之時間。 根據本發明之第二十二態樣,提供如在第二十一態樣所 界定之遙控監視糸統,其中負載為一照明負載,並且在收 到對應於作動一與組控制相關之開關之資料時,轉移控制 器順序傳輸一轉移訊號,包括與組控制及一個別位址關聯 之每一照明負載之目標光亮度水维。隨後,轉移控制器傳 輸一轉移訊號,包括一同時控制位址及控制資料,供指令 照明負載開始進行控制操作。因此,相同同時控制位址所 分配之操作端子實際同時接收相同轉移訊號•並在宵際相 同定時開始控制照明負載,藉Κ防止發生使用者將會認為 陌生之時間滯後。 根據本發明之第二十三態樣,提供如在第二十二態樣所 界定之遙控監視糸統,其中在操作端子所提供*具有開關 之端子處理區段,在轉移訊號所包括之位址賣料匹配同時 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 25 1-----1 I I ---,' --------訂·---n J I <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 3δ0 4 9«ΐ Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(23) 控制位 資料。 根據 之遙控 ,其連 中設定 一顯 一透 一控 ,在設 容闞聯 作區段 控制 MlLl tzfiff ,對應 根據 址時,阻止 因此,可阻 本發明之第 監視糸統, 接至訊號線 操作端子具 示器,能指 明觸控板, 制區段,其 定模式,有 之觸控板之 之操作進行 區段之處理 之一部份之 本發明之第 界定之遙控監視糸 與一安装框架者相 傳輸轉移訊號,包括對應於作動開關之 止一希望之開關控制負載。 二十四態樣,提供如在第一態樣所界定 其中該操作端子包括:一設定操作端子 ,並且其包括操作區段及顯示區段;其 有: 示字元及圖形, 重叠在顯示器之螢幕,Μ及 可在一設定模式與一操作模式之間選擇 設定處理對應於一分配至與顯示器之内 操作區段之操作,在操作模式,響應操 處理,Κ及 包含至少使用 功能,及確定 二十五態樣, 統,其中一有 同,一在大小 段作為開翮之功能 功能。 提供如在第二 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 操作區 對應之 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 附件尺寸之整倍數之配媒附件, 至少 配線附 根據 盒安裝孔,作為一附羼 件之開關盒 本發明之第 所界定之遙控監視 配一相等於開闞之 應之個別位址至操 之盒螺訂,可 二十六態樣, 系統,其中控 位址對應於負 作區段之功能 一安装區段 上等於 可附著 件區段 予Μ插 另提供 制區段 載之位 ,以及 十四態樣所 其安裝間距 一大正方串列配線 至此安裝件;Κ及 予Μ旋緊至 内。 二十五態樣 在設定模式具有分 ,一能 入至其 如在第 址成一種一對一對 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 26 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(24) 在操作模式藉使用者操作操作個別位址分配之區段啟動 或中斷負載之功能。 根據本發明之第二十t態樣*另提供如在第二十六態樣 所界定之遙控監視系統,其中控制區段在設定模式具有分 配一相等於開關之位址對應於許多負載之位址成一種一對 很多對應之組位址至操作區段之功能,Μ及 使許多負載成相同狀態之功能;在操作模式,藉使用者 操作組位址分配之操作區段啟動或中斷。 附圖之簡單說明 圖1為方塊圖,示一根據本發明第一質施例之遙控監視 系統之主要元件; 圖2為略圖,略示一使用遙控監視糸統之實例; 圖3為說明圖,示圖2中所示遙控監視糸統操作所根據之 控制程序: 團4為說明圖 圖5為說明圖 控制程序; 圆6為略圖,略示一使用根據本發明第三簧陁例之遙控 監視系統之實例; 圖7為說明圖,示圖6中所示遙控監視系統操作所根據之 控制程序; 圖8為略圖,略示一習知遙控監視系統之構形; 圖9為說明圖,示遙控監視系统之操作; 圖10為說明圖,示圖8中所示遙控監視系統操作所根據 示根據本發明第二實胞例之控制程序; 示圖4中所示遙控監視糸統操作所根據之 泰紙張尺度適用t國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 297公釐) -27 - (請先閱讀背面之沒意事項再填寫本頁) ----裝!----訂------II _味! Α7 _Β7_ 五、發明說明(25 ) 之控制程序; 圖11為說明圔,示圖6中所示遙控監視系統進行組控制 所根據之程序; 圖12為略圖•略示遙控監視系統之構形之另一實例; 圖13為方塊圈,示一習知遙控監視系統ί 圖14為一在圖13中之系統所使用傳输訊號之實例; 圖15為說明圖,供示一在圖13之遙控監視糸統之顯示器 單元所指示顯示之霣例; 圖16為說明圖,供示一在圖13之遙控監視系統之顯示器 單元所指示顯示之實例; 圖17為說明圖,供示一在圖13之遙控監視糸統之顯示器 里元所指示顯示之實例; 圔18為說明圖,供示一在圈13之遙控監視系統之顯示器 單元所指示顯示之實例; 圖19為說明圖,供示一在圖13之遙控監視系統之顯示器 翬元所指示顯示之實例; 圖20為說明圖*供示一在圖13之遙控監視系統之顯示器 單元所指示顯示之實例; 圖21為說明圖*示圃2中所示遙控監視系統操作所根據 之控制程序; 圖22為圖21中所示遙控監視系統操作所根據之資料表; 圖23為圖2中所示遙控監視系統操作所根據之修改資料 表; 圖24為說明圖*示圖23中所示遙控監視糸統操作所根據 之控制程序; 圖25為說明圖,示一在本發明之第六實施例之位元圖格 式之位址; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝------訂·!------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 一 28 — A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(26) 圖26為說明圖*示本發明之第t實施例; 圖27為說明圖,示一在圖26進行之操作; 圖28為說明圖*示本發明之第八實施例; 圖29為說明圖,示一在圖28進行之揲作; 圖30為方塊匾|示一使用於一根據本發明實施例之遙控 監視糸統之設定操作端子; 圖31為方塊圖•示遙控監視糸統之構形之實例; 圖32為分解透視圖,示使用於遙控監視糸統之設定操作 端子; 圖33為說明圖•供示在遙控監視糸統之顧示器單元所指 示顯示之窖例; 圖34為說明圖*供示在遙控監視系統之顯示器單元所指 示顯示之實例; 圖35為說明圖*供示在遙控監視糸統之顯示器單元所指 示顯示之實例; 圖36為說明圖,供示在遙控監視系統之顯示器單元所指 示顧示之實例; 圖37為說明圖,供示在遙控監視糸統之顯示器單元所指 示顯示之實例; 圖38為說明圖,供示在遙控監視糸統之顯示器單元所指 示顯示之實例; 圖39為說明圖,供示在遙控監視系統之顯示器單元所指 示顯示之實例; 圖40為說明圖,供示在遙控監視糸統之顯示器單元所指 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 29 ------------裝--------訂---------據 Η (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(27 ) 示顯示之實例; 圖41為說明圖,供示在遙控監視系統之顯示器單元所指 示顯示之實例; 圖42為說明圖,供示在遙控監視糸統之顯示器單元所指 示顯示之實例;Μ及 圖43Α至43C為說明圖,供示在遙控監視糸統之顯示器單 元所指示顯示之實例; 較佳實施例之詳细說明 第一實施例 圖1示一根據第一實施例本發明之遙控監視糸統。圖1示 一轉移控制器30及控制端子32。 轉移控制器30包含一轉移處理區段20,其包括一微處理 器。轉移處理區段20藉由一轉移驅動器電路21予Μ連接至 一訊號線Ls。轉移處理區段20之操作係由一儲存在包括 ROM之程式快閃記憶體22之程式所界定。在端子間之對應 Μ表之形式予Μ儲存在可重新寫入資料記憶體23。合宜為 ,資料記憶體23包含非易失性記憶體,諸如EEPR0M。在轉 移控制器30 之操作時,在轉移控制器30與端子之間交換 之資料,予以儲存在包含例如RAM之工作記憶體24。 控制端子32係供變暗目的,並且每一控制端子32予以連 接至一照明器具33(請見圖2),藉K控制自一在照明器具 3 3提供之照明負載所輸出光之強度。因此*根據諸實施例 之控制端子32在下文將稱作”減光器端子"。在使用白熾燈 作為照明負載之情形,將一包括三極管交流開鼷(TRIAC) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 30 n *^1 HI I —Γ n ) I n n h 口, -----線γ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 _ B7 _ 五、發明說明(28) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 之減光器併入在減光器端子32。在使用發光燈作為照明負 載之情形,在照明器具之減光器併入藉輸出減光器資料予 K控制。特別是,如果照明器具33包括白熾燈’圖1中所 示之減光器控制區段14設有一減光器。對照而言,如果照 明器具33包括一螢光燈,減光器控制區段14具有產生減光 器資料之功能。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 已配合相關技齧所說明,減光器端子32藉由二電線Ls予 Μ連接至轉移控制器30,及轉移訊號藉時分多工傳輸方法 在轉移控制器30與減光器端子32之間予Κ傳輸。每一減光 器端子32包含一端子處理區段10,其包括一微電腦。端子 處理區段10藉由一傳輸/接收電路11予Μ連接至訊號線Ls 。傳輸 /接收電路11接收一雙極轉移訊號,在訊號線Ls予 以傳輸,並使如此接收之訊號退極化(或使訊號經歷全波 整流)。如此整流之訊號予以傳輸至一端子處理區段10。 而且*減光器端子32也配備有一功率電路,供自在訊號線 Ls予Μ傳輸之轉移訊號抽取功率。自端子處理區段10返回 至轉移控制器30之訊號,藉傳輸/接收電路11予Μ轉換to 之一目前模式訊號,並且目W模式訊號予Μ發出至訊號線 Ls 0 減光器端子32設有一個別位址設定區段12及一同時控制 位址設定區段13。同時控制位址設定區段13包含非易失性 記憶體,諸如EEPR0M,並且個別位址設定區段12包含一雙 列直插式開關或非易失性記憶體。一設定在個別位址設定 區段12之個別位址為對應個別減光器端子32所獨特者。連 31 - 表紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS>A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ,4350 厶9,·, A7 _B7_五、發明士兌明(23) 接至訊號線Ls之減光器端子32之個別位址Μ致使避免重叠 之方式予Μ設定。對照而言* —單一同時控制位址予以共 同設定在連接至訊號線Ls之各別減光器端子32之同時控制 位址設定區段13。僅一個別位址予K設定在個別位址設定 區段12,但許多同時控制位址可設定在同時位址設定區段 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 13 ° 依據在 端子處理 端子32之 ,如果在 段12 所 藉由減光 定在組控 料與同時 由減光器 如Μ上 別位址及 *目標光 光器端子 同時位址 所分配之 *因此控 據本實施 接收訊號 訊號線L s傳輸之 區段10選擇個別 位址。在模式資 轉移訊號所包括 設定之個別位址 器控制區段1 4控 制横式之情形* 控制位址之間存 控制區段1 4控制 所述*減光器端 同時控制位址。 亮度水準指令順 3 2。隨後,一供 發出至減光器端 許多減光器端子 制照明負載,而 例,許多減光器 轉移訊號。 轉移訊號中所包括之模式資料, 位址或同時控制位址作為減光器 料予以設定至一個別模式之情彤 之位址資料與在個別位址設定區 之間存在匹配,端子處理區段1 0 制照明負載。在模式資料予Μ設 如果在轉移訊號所包括之位址資 在匹配•端子處理區段10負載藉 照明。 子32有二種型式之位址;亦即個 在模式控制(亦即組控制)完成時 序發出至為模式控制之目的之減 開始減光器操作之指令通過使用 子32;亦即,相同同時控制位址 32實際同時接收減光器開始指令 不涉及時間滯後。更特別是*根 端子32可通過使用同時控制位址 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --------訂--------I I - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 32 4 3 5 0 4 9 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(30) 如圖2中所示,許多減光器端子32(在圖2中為三端子)藉 由訊號線Ls,通過多點連接,予以連接至轉移控制器30。 操作端子31a及31b予Μ連接至訊號線Ls*其中每一操作端 子31a與一單一照明負載翮聯(如先前所述*照明器具33包 含照明負載)成一種一對一關係,並且每一操作端子31b與 許多照明負載關聯。每一操作端子31a及32b包含一 on/off 開關Sa,供指令一將行予Μ照明或熄滅之照明負載;一 UP 開關Sb*供指令照明負載增加自其輸出光之強度;一 DOWN 開闞Sc,供指令照明負載減少光之強度;Μ及一顯示區段 LD,其包含對準在一單一擋案之許多發光二極管*並藉若 干照明發光二極管指示自對應照明負載所輸出光之強度( 減光器狀態)。雖然在圖中未示,一供Μ —種每組基礎指 示照明負載之操作狀態之顯示器端子*依需要予以連接至 訊號線Ls,以便在監視室密集監視照明負載之操作狀態。 與一單一照明負載關聯之操作端子3 la稱為”個別減光器開 關”。與許多照明負載關聯之操作端= 31b稱為”模式減光 器開闞”。 在作動個別減光器開關31 a之一之任一開關Sa至Sc時, 轉移控制器30傳輸關於如此按壓之開關之操作資訊至先前 與開關31a關聯成一種預先設定關係之單一減光器端子32 。on/of f開關Sa指令照明負載之啟動或中斷。如果UP開關 Sb或DOWN開關Sc被作動,同畤照明負載為在啟動狀態,便 相應調整自照明負載所輸出光之強度。例如,如果DOWN開 關Sc被壓下*減光器端子32被指令開始減少光之強度。在 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 33 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -r ΐ裝--------訂---------據 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ^ 4 350 49 ··* A7 _ B7____ 五、發明說明(31) DOWN開關Sc被釋放時,減光器端子32被指令停止減少光之 強度。 UP開關Sb及DOWN開關Sc藉轉移訊號,並通過使用二參数 指令減光器端子32;亦即,一開始壓下開關之時刻及一釋 放開闞之時刻。在收到由於使用者壓下UP開關“或⑽㈣開 II SC 而输出之轉移訊號其時,減光器端子32W與時間經 過闞聯之既定速率,自開始改變光強度之時間’直到停止 改變光強度之時間,改變自照明負載所输出光之強度。實 際上,自照明負載所输出光之強度係改變逐步。每一步光 強度改變之量及每秒光強度之改變速率,W致使自照明負 載輸出之光見為連續改變之方式予以設定。 在作動模式減光器開闞31b之開闥Sa時,轉移訊號Μ諸 如圈3中所示者之方式*傳輸至腸於該組之各別減光器端 子32 。在圖3中所示遙控監視糸統之構形,模式減光器開 醑31b予以分配至 減光器端子32 (1),32 (2),及 32(3)之相同同時控制位址。 在按壓組減光器開關31b之開醑Sd時,一供指令控制光 強度之操作訊號0P1傳輪至轉移控制器30。轉移控制器30 顒序傳输控制訊號CN11,CN12,及CN13,分別至減光器端 子32(1),32(2),及32(3),其各包括一目檷光亮度(減光 器)水準作為控制賣料。更特別是*控制訊號CN 11包含減 光器端子32之個別位址之(1)作為位址資料,並且也包含 連接至減光器端子32(1)之照明負載之目標光亮度水準作 為控制資料。每一減光器端子32健存目檷光亮度水準。在 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 34 ! —--Γ.--I I--Θ 裝 _ — 11 訂 — ! (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 蟓 435049m A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印« 五、發明說明(32) 已通過訊號線Ls顒序傳輸控制訊號CN11,CN12’及CN13後 ,轉移控制器30通過訊號線Ls,以組控制模式傳輸一分配 同時控制位址(亦即控制訊號CN14)之轉移訊號。減光器端 子32(1),32(2)·及32(3)實際同時接收控制訊號CH14。 因此,減光器端子32(1)’ 32(2),及32(3)實際同時開始 _暗照明節點之強度。通過此程序,不論減光器端子32之 數,操作資訊實際同時自模式減光器開關31b傳輸至每一 減光器端子32*而不涉及時間滯後。操作訊號0P1及控制 訊號CN11至C1H4為轉移訊號。 只要許多同時控制位址予Μ分配至一單一減光器端子32 ,減光器端子32可羼於不同之數組。例如,一會議室或一 簡報室可使用作為一單一房間,或分隔為許多隔間時予以 使用。在此種情形*將行受到組控制之照明負載之範圍予 Μ改變。在一組所包括之照明負載也必須予>乂接合至另一 組。如果個別減光器端子32僅可分配一同時控制位址,減 光器端子32 可僅包括在一組。根據本實皰例之遙控監視 系統使個別減光器端子32能屬於若干組。即使一個別減光 器端子Μ —種重昼方式予以暫存在許多組,也無問題發生 ,從而使能動態及容易設定組控制。 如Μ上所述*由於許多同時控制位址可分配至一個別減 光器端子32*每一減光器端子32可包括在若干不同組。例 如,一會議室或一簡報室可使用作為一單一房間或分隔為 許多隔間時予Μ使用。在此種情形,將行受到組控制之照 明負載之範圍予Μ改變。在一單一組所包括之照明負載, 本紙張尺度適用f國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 35 I } I— I I Γ ^ I I n I . ( · I f I I I I I I I I I I I ^ I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 435049^ A7 B7 五、發明說明(ϋ) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 必須予Μ分開為不同組。如果個別減光器端子32僅可分配 —同時控制位址,減光器端子3 2可僅包括在一組。根據第 —例之遙控監視枭統使個別減光器端子32能屬於若干 組。即使一個別減光器端子W 一種重®方式予以暫存在許 多組,也無問題發生’從而使能動態及容晃設定組控制° 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作社印製 表示將行受到組控制之減光器端子32所鼷於之諸組之組 資料,予以賭存在轉移控制器30之資料記憶體23。組資料 可藉轉移控制器或藉一自一組設定裝置,藉由訊號線Ls 所傳輪之轉移訊號予M設定。例如,如果改變該組之減先 器端子32(亦即改變組資料),由於在房間布局之改變’同 時控制位址必須再次予以分配至減光器端子32 °分配同時 控制位址至各別減光器端子32係藉由訊號線Ls *藉傳輸同 時控制位址至減光器端子32之方法,或藉由另一傳輸媒· 藉傳_同時控制位址至減光器端子32之方法所達成。根據 後一方法,同時控制位址係由一與遙控監視系統單獨提供 之設定裝置所準備’並且同時控制位址通過使用光學無線 訊號或一連接至減光器端子32之連接線’予Μ傳輸至減光 器端子32。對照而言,根據前一方法,同時控制位址係藉 由訊號線Ls自轉移控制器30傳輸至減光器端子32。 在將行受到組控制之設定或改變減光器端子32時’轉移 控制器30檢測目前所使用並分配一現有同時控制位址至各 別減光器端子32之同時控制位址。換言之,遙控監視糸統 被使成一種狀態,在此狀態,糸統使能設定组控制(亦即 糸統在組設定模式被啟動)。如果提供指令(由製造廠商自 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x 297公釐) -36 _ 4350 49'' A7 ___B7 五、發明說明(34 ) 外面所賦予 >,供使模式減光器開關31b與照明負載(減先 器端子32)關聯,便自動計算一規有同時控制位址’並且 如此計算之同時控制位址K位址設定訊號之形式予以傳输 至各別減光器端子32,並暫存在其中° 通過使用上逑轉移控制器30,自動選擇一現有同時控制 位址,並且如此選擇之位址予以暫存至各別減光器端子32 。因此,可設定組控制,而不需要知道同時控制位址。而 且,只要摆擇將行分配同時控制位址之減光器端子32 ’轉 移控制器30便進行操作’供分配同時控制位址至各別減 光器端子32。因而,操作較之供分配同時控制位址至各別 減光器端子32之操作方便。 即使在減光器端子32之數與遙控監視糸統之延伸部份關 聯而增加,或在現有減光器端子32之個別位址改變之情形 ,同時控制位址也必須予以分配至另外提供之減光器端子 32,或個別位址改變之減光器端子32。為此目的,另外提 供之減光器端子32或個別位址改變之減光器端子32在全時 輪詢操作時發出一中斷訊號,藉Μ告知轉移控制器30減光 器端子之增加,或個別位址之改變。轉移控制器30藉位址 設定訊號傳輪同時控制位址至所有減光器端子32*藉以分 配同時控制位址至減光器端子32。已告知轉移控制器30之 減光器端子32 所現有之同時控制位址通過上述處理操作 予以確定,並且如此確定之同時控制位址予以暫存。 如以上所逑,在個別位址予Κ分配至新減光器端子32, 或分配至減光器端子32之個別位址予Κ改變之情形,轉移 f紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---- -------1.!- -裝 ϊ I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂* .經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -37 - 435049 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(33 ) 控制器30自動確定對應於減光器端子3 2所靥於之組之同時 控制位址,並通過使用轉移訊號 > 分配如此確定之同時控 制位址至減光器端子32*因此大為方便設定同時控制位址 之操作。如Μ上所述,在同時控制位址藉轉移訊號予以分 配至減光器端子32之情形,實際上同時控制位址可能不正 確傳輪至減光器端子32,並且在進入訊號線U之雜訊影響 下,另一不同同時控制位址可η設定至減光器端子32。當 然*在此情形*可進行一不同於預計操作之組減光器操作。 在本案簧施例,係藉設定Κ下所將說明之同時控制位址 根據程序防止此問題。 轉移控制器30配合關於同時控制位址識別資料,分配同 時控制位址至減光器端子32。識別資料對應於檢査和資料 ,其為藉各別減光器端子32之個別位址,在設定同時控制 位址時之時刻總合所形成,並且同時控制位址包括16資料 組,每一資料組包含8位元。在分配同時控制位址至減光 器端子32前,轉移控制器30進行輪詢操作,並要求各別減 光器端子32使其最近通過使用轉移訊號所設定之識別資料 返回,藉以獲得檢査和資料,包含最近所已分配至各別減 光器端子及包括茌識別資料中之個別位址,以及最近所已 設定之同時控制資科。如此所獲得檢査和資料(亦即識別 資料)與儲存在資料記憶體23之識別資料比較。如果儲存 在資料記憶體23之識別資料與如此獲得之識別資料之間存 在匹配;亦即*如果對應於某一個別位址之同時控制位址 與予Κ設定之同時控制位址完全相同*便無需要重新分配 紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -38 - (諳先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·I —-----訂--------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 350 49 A7 B7 五、發明說明 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 同時控制位址至減光器端子 32。為此原因,不實施同時 控制位址之分配。僅在儲存在資料記憶體23之識別資料與 所獲得之識別資料之間存在差異時,同時控制位址才必須 予Μ分配至減光器端子32。在此種情形,使用轉移訊號將 同時控制位址傳輸及分配至減光器端子32,藉Μ確保藉轉 移訊號分配同時控制資料。在檢査同時控制資料,並且同 時控制資料分配至所有端子後*醞於所有傳輪之資料組之 檢査和予Μ交換,藉Κ改進同時控制資料之可靠性。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 如果在轉移控制器30已結束分配同時控制位址至減光器 端子32前關閉遙控監視糸統,實際上應該予Μ啟動之同時 控制資料可η不匹配分配至各別減光器端子32之同時控制 位址。當然,進行一不同於預計組減光器操作之組減光器 操作。只要轉移控制器30在接通時檢査分配至連接至訊號 線Ls之減光器端子32之同時控制位址,可防止此種不合格 操作。如果同時控制位址不同於一應該予Μ分配至減光器 端子32之位址,轉移控制器30通過使用轉移訊號重新分配 一正確同時控制位址至減光器端子32。或則,在通常藉轉 移控制器30所進行之輪詢操作時,轉移控制器30可檢査同 時控制位址。 依據在該組内藉 轉移控制器30所進行之輪詢操作自減 光器端子32返回之光輸出資料,每一組減光器開關31b之 顯示區段LD之顯示予Μ改變。在該組内自照明負載之光之 實際發出滯後於在組減光器開翮31b之顯示區段LD指示之 出現。使用者可能認為此種時間滯後為陌生。 39 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) :·) 3 4 3« 釋 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(37) 在該組内自照明負載輸出之光改變時,轉移控制器30參 考一儲存在資料記憶體23之組資料表,並輪詢靥於該組個 別減光器端子23,儍先於其他端子。如果Μ儍先化方式輪 詢將行受到組控制之減光器端子3 2 *減光器端子3 2使關於 在該組内自照明負載所輸出光之資料返回。因此,防止在 照明負載之實際照明與在組減光器開關31b之顯示區段LD 指示之出現間之時間滞後*因此使能指示顯示,而不涉及 否則將會發生並被使用者認為陌生之時間滯後。 第二實施例 照明器具在室内在夜間予Μ照明之情形,如果照明器具 之光強度瞬間增加,便對眼施加沉重負載。使供個別控制 目的之減光器端子32具備一種衰減功能,供在作動個別減 光器開關31a之on/off開關Sa時,逐漸增加自照明負載所 輸出光之強度,藉以提供一第二實施例。根據本實施例遙 控監視系統,在基本構形上等於根摟第一實施例之遙控監 視系統,故此處予Μ省略其解釋及圖示。 預先暫存在轉移控制器30之資料記憶體23之資料,係關 於在作動個別減光器開關31a之on/off開關Sa時,對應減 光器端子32之照明負載所照明之程度(亦即目標減光器水 準)。減光器水準資料可藉個別減光器開關31a或藉稍後所 將說明之模式設定裝置予以設定。 現將參照圖4中所示之實例,說明根據第二質施例之個 別控制之操作。在此實例,減光器端子32之照明負載之強 度,藉個別減光器開關3 1 a在三秒内(此時間期間稱為”衰 (請先閱讀背面之王意事項再填寫本頁) I --------訂,-----I I 1^- „ · 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用t國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 40 Λ Λ _ 五、發明說明(38) Α7 Β7 ΰ 明 照 大 最 6 之 至載 加負31 增明闞 M照開 予於器 Γ 應光 間對減 時準別 滅水個 目 示 X -T ο 所 10中 子 端 器 準圖光 水在減 器。與 光I)係 明 減彳址 沼'' 標 目戈別 個 之 器,a 光統 g 0 減系 之 標之 h 關 ij 器 光 減 riu 〇 個 聯下 關壓 址在 位 ο 之 減 別 個 時 3 S 闊 開 示 表1 輸 傳 3 1 3 關 開 器 光 號 訊 作 操 之 下 壓 被 a S 關 開 >0睇 器(6請 —, S 關 控水ϊί 位 移器,Jt 轉 光 爿 I ...... 睡 0 0, on標 a p« n 1X o 目 3 定關 設開 先器 預光 示減 表別 一 個 輸與 傳至 o L 3 Η 器: 制 控 移 轉 號 訊 號作 訊操 準輸 水傳 之已 子 端 器 光 減 之 2 3 子 端 器 光 減 0 钱 負 照 之 傳0¾ 也準 30水 器器 制光 控減 移在 β 動 τρπτι I 啟 後供 随 , 2 ο 3 32子 號 訊 1-" ο 一 輸 端 器 光 減 至 到 收 在 且 並 體 憶 記 在 存 儲Μ 予 準 水 器 光 減 槱g 之 收 接 所 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ON訊號CHon時*減光器端子32啟動在減光器水準 0¾之照 明負載。 轉移控制器30傳輸一包括衰減時間(=三秒)之衰減開始 訊號CNfe至減光器端子32。在收到衰減開始訊號CNfe時, 減光器端子32計算在三秒内增加照明負載之強度自減光器 水準0¾至目標減光器水準(60¾)所需要之變暗速率。根據 如此計算之變暗速率*減光器端子32進行一所謂漸顯操作 ,藉Μ逐漸增加照明負載之強度。現將參照圖5說明在目標減光器水準所照明之照明負載 之消光。在按壓個別減光器開關31a之on/off開關Sa,同時照明 負載在目標減光器水準(60¾)予Μ照明時,個別減光器開 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 41 ----------111 I -----J — — 訂-----i_^< (請先閲婧背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 435049^ A7 ____B7__ 五、發明說明(39 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 醞31a傳輸一表示按壓〇n/〇ff開關Sa之操作訊號〇p〇ff至轉 移控制器30。轉移控剌器30傳輸一表示目標減光器水準 (0 S;)之水準訊號至與個別減光器開鼸31a之個別位址關 聯,已傅輸操作訊號OPoff減光器端子32。減光器端子32 所接收之目標減光器水準予以儲存在記憶體。 其次,轉移控制器30傳輸包括衰減時間(三秒)之衰減開 始訊號CNfe至減光器端子32。在收到衰減開始訊號CNfe時 ,減光器端子32計算在三秒内減少照明負載之強度自減·光 器水準60¾至目摞減光器水準0X所爾要之變暗速率。根撺 如此計算之變暗速率,減光器端子32進行一所諝漸陳操作 ,藉Μ逐漸減少照明負載之減光器水準。與傳輸衰減開始 訊號CNfe同時,轉移控制器30開始計數衰減時間。在轉移 控制器30已結束計數衰減時間時之時刻,一供中掰照明負 載之OFF訊號CNoff傳輸至減光器端子32。日接收OFF訊號 CHoff之減光器端子32中斷照明負載。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消黄合作社印製 如K上所述,通過個別減光器開關31a之on/off開關Sa 之按壓動作,對應減光器端子32 Μ自目標減光器水準及衰 減時間所計算之變暗速率,逐漸改變照明負載之減光器水 準。因之,逐渐改變自照明負載所输出光之強度,藉以減 輕由於燿眼而對眼所胞加之負載,並使能根據環境精心控 制照明。 使用者可能希望在某一位置逐漸改變照明負載之減光器 水準,但迅速改變置於另一位置之照明負載之減光器水準 。為此目的,衰減時間可自一照明負載至另一照明負載予 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) -42 - 4350 49>^ A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(40) Μ任意設定*藉以使能根據瑁境精心控制照明。 第三實施例 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 配置在寬廣區域諸如會議室之照明器具*僅位於例如 0ΗΡ予Μ投影處之照明器具,其光亮度予Μ減少,直到其 變為低於位於房間内其他位置之照明器具之光亮度。在此 種情形*完成模式控制•藉Μ藉集體控制許多照明負載* 實琨希望之照明。即使在此模式控制時,如果突然改變自 照明負載所輸出光之強度*房間之佔用人也被耀眼*因此 對眼施加沉重負載。在第三實施例,對模式控制應用衰減 功能•藉以防止此問題。 在模式控制時實現衰減功能時,必須考慮自將行受到模 式控制之許多照明負載所輸出之光,必須同時開始或停止 增加。在習知遙控監視系統所進行之模式控制*已自操作 端子接收操作訊號供模式控制目的之轉移控制器,參考一 有模式暫存在其中之模式表,並順序傳輸控制資料至各別 減光器端子。因此,在減光器端子開始或停止改變自照明 負載所輸出光之強度之定時發生時間滯後。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本質施例進行根據下列程序之模式控制•藉Κ解決此問 題。 圖6示一根據第三實施例之遙控監視糸統之構形。該系 統不同於根據第一實施例之糸統,僅其中一供模式控制使 用之操作端子(在下文稱作”模式開關”)31ci及一供在該 組内集體啟動或中斷照明負載之操作端子(在下文稱作”組 開關”)31d藉由訊號線Ls予Μ連接至轉移控制器30。模式 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 公釐) ~ ~二 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(41) 資料予Μ預先儲存在轉移控制器30之資料記憶體23。模式 資料包含各別減光器端子32之個別位址,其控制將行受到 橫式控制之照明負載;各別減先器端子32之目標減光器水 準:衰減時間*·及共同分配至各別減光器端子32之同時控 制位址。 根據第三實施例之遙控監視糸統之模式控制操作將參照 圖7中所示之實例予以說明。在此實例,減光器端子32(1) 至 32 (4)之照明負載,藉模式開關31c予Κ增加至其在衰 減時間六秒内之各別目標減光器水準·•亦卽,減光器端子 32(1)之照明負載予以增加至目標減光器水準30¾ ;減光器 端子32(2)之照明負載予以增加至目標減光器水準60;ϊ;減 光器端子32(3>z之照明負載予Μ增加至目標減光器水準 100JK; Μ及減光器端子 32(4)之之照明負載予Μ增加至目 標減光器水準0¾。在圖7中所示之糸統構形,模式開闞31c 之個別位址係與同時控制減光器端子32(1)至32 (4)之位址 關聯。 按壓模式開關31c之開闞Sd時,模式開關31c傳輸操作訊 號OPon至轉移控制器30。在參考儲存在資料記憶體23之模 式表後,轉移控制器30順序傅输表示各別預先設定目標減 光器水準之訊號CHu至至各別減光器端子32(1)至 32(4)其藉處理個別位址作為位址資料之轉移訊號分配對 應於已傳輸訊號OPon横式開關31c之個別位址之同時控制 位址。其次,轉移控制器30順序傳輸0N訊號CNon,供藉處 理個別位址作為位址資料之相同轉移訊號,Μ減光器水準 本紙張尺度適用争國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) <請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) '-裝--------訂---------線 經濟部智慧財產局員X消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 435049^ A7 ___B7五、發明說明(42) 0¾啟動照明負載。各別減光器端子32(1)至32(4)所接收之 目標滅光器水準予以儲存在記憶體。在減光器端子32U) 至32(4)接收0N訊號之時刻,減光器端子从減光器水準0¾ 啟動照明負載。 陳後,轉移控制器30藉處理同時控制位址作為位址資科 ,傳輸包括衰減時間(六秒)之衰減開始訊號CNfe至各別減 光器端子32(1)。因此,各別減光器端子32(1)至32(4)可 實際同時接收衰減開始訊號CNfe。在收到衰減開始訊號 CNfe時,減光器端子32(1)至32(4)各計算在六秒内增加照 明負載之強度自減光器水準0¾至各別目標減光器水準所需 要之變暗速率,並根據計算之變暗速率(亦即漸顯操作)增 加照明負載之強度。與傳輸衰滅開始訊號CHfe同時*轉移 控制器30開始計數衰減時間。在轉移控制器30已结束計數 衰減時間之時刻*供中斷照明負載之OFF訊號CNoff傳输至 目標減光器水準予Μ設定至0¾之減光器端子32(4)。已接 收OFF訊號CNoff之減光器端子32(4)中斷照明負裁。 如Μ上所述*通過模式開關31c之開闞Sd之按壓動作, 每一葑應減光器端子32(1)至32(4)計算自目標減光器水準 之麥暗速率及衰減時間。自轉移控制器30收到處理位址資 料作為同時控制位址之衰.減開始訊號CNfe時*減光器端子 32(1)至32(4)逐漸改變照明負載之強度與其各別目標減光 器水準一致。由於同時改變將行受到模式控制之照明負載 之強度,故可完成天然模式控制。而且,在光強度之逐漸 改變使能減輕由於耀眼而對眼所施加之負擔,並使能根據 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公ϋ - 45 - ------[--— I!裝! —訂 ------!線 (請先閱讀背面之注惠事項再填寫本頁) 五、發明說明(4:ί) A7 B7 器準 光水 減器 之光 HUM 負之 明載 照 負 變明 改照 漸之 逐置 置位 位 一 一 另 某於 。在置 明望變 照希 改 制能速 控可迅 心者但 精用 -境使準 環水This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) j〇A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (10) (Please read the note on the back & fill in this page before filling this page) Each area is given K Divided into array 1 Even when only one of the loads 33 in the group is in the starting state, the indicator lights of the group switches are illuminated. This group of lights will only go out when all loads 33 are interrupted. Therefore, the load 33 can be monitored from a remote location, such as a monitoring room. The indication of the status of the load 33 can be output to an external device * such as a central monitor instrument panel through a communication interface terminal or a contact interface terminal f. In the case where an individual switch or group of switches is activated (or locally activated) in each area, according to the operating state display method, it is one of the loads 33 that are both in the off state as shown in FIG. 15. ) When K is activated, the indicator of the * group switch remains off. If the group switch is activated in this state> All loads 33 are activated, and as a result, the display of the indicator light matches the actual operating state. Therefore, natural operation becomes feasible. In contrast, according to the monitoring status monitoring method, even when only one of the loads 33 is activated as shown in Fig. 16, the indicator of the group switch is illuminated. If the group switch is activated at this time, all loads 33 are interrupted. Although trying to start all loads 33, load 33 cannot be started unless all loads 33 * are interrupted and the group switch is activated again. The indication of the indicator does not match the actual operation *, which results in unnatural operation. If the operation terminals 31 of all groups are set to K to the operating state display method, this method is suitable for local operation, but cannot be used for monitoring in the center. Even in this case * as long as the indicator of the operation terminal is used for mode control purpose *, the monitoring function can be realized. If you try to control the start / interrupt load in one area by using one mode *, you must use two mode switches *, which results in the necessary number of mode circuits (first problem). In contrast, 13 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Α7 Β7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (π, if the operation terminal 31 is set to Μ to The monitoring status display method, the local operation becomes unnatural. Although the multiplexing method is used in the center to monitor the local operation, the above problems cannot be solved. In the above remote monitoring system, a single control terminal 32 may be assigned to In the case of many groups. In this type of system * as shown in FIG. 17, if one group of switches is activated, all loads in group A are interrupted simultaneously regardless of the state of the load (X). It has a large floor in the office In the case of space, a suitable measure may be to divide the office into sections * and assign groups to the sections. The activation or interruption of the lighting load is controlled by M on a per-group basis. In this case, if a The lighting load of the group is interrupted, and the area below the adjacent group (segment) is also slightly darkened. The area below the adjacent group prevents such a decrease in brightness, and it is possible to Similar measures, as shown in FIG. 18, include assigning overlapping lighting loads located between the sections to groups A and B. Therefore, even if the lighting load of group A is interrupted, the lighting loads included in arrays A and B are not Interrupt. This control method is called ON-priority control method, and the commonly implemented control method is called later operation priority control method. However * ON-priority control method involves the following problems. For example, as shown in FIG. 19 It shows that group B containing sections and group A for monitoring the entire floor including group B cannot be used at the same time. More specifically, the group switch corresponding to local group B cannot be interrupted, and the load included in group B cannot be interrupted. Initially, actuate a group switch that opposes the entire group A to interrupt the load included in group A and that does not belong to group B. Subsequently, actuate the group switch corresponding to group B to interrupt the load belonging to group B by M As shown in Figures 20A to 20E, in many local groups D and E to M set to a paper size applicable _ National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 14 --------- J --- T -------- Order --------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back first Refill this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 350 4 A7 _ _ B7____ V. Description of the Invention (12) In the case of large group C, each load is at least one of groups C to E. In In the case of starting all loads, actuating the group switch corresponding to any group of groups C to E, no load can be interrupted. To prevent this, as shown in FIG. 20B, it is provided in each group C to E Individual virtual switches K1 to K3 in any of the groups, and each virtual switch K1 to K3 is interrupted when the counter group is opened. As shown in FIGS. 20C to 20E, the indicator of the group switch can be turned off. (Because there is an interrupted load in this group). However, K must be equal to the number of groups to provide a virtual control circuit that was originally unnecessary *, thus increasing the equipment cost U. In a remote monitoring system such as the one described previously * Various functions are combined by the transfer controller 1 and various terminals Achieved. However, in many cases, new functions are added to the transfer controller, and the terminals for coupling and improvement are implemented every year. And * a transfer controller with extended functions can be connected to a newly developed terminal with new functions. In these cases, an old type transfer controller lacking new functions can be connected to a new terminal with new functions. According to the current situation, the terminal is not provided with a device for reliably checking the function of the transfer controller. The II transfer controller may render the entire remote monitoring system inoperable in the worst case, and may not take advantage of a new function in any case. Even if various data is set at the terminal (such as group and mode data) *, because the type does not match, the data cannot be sent to the transfer controller, which makes the setting operation useless. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been conceived in accordance with the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a remote monitoring system that can simultaneously start many lighting loads that will be controlled by a group without involving time lag. This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS> A4 size (210 X 297 mm) -15-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) n ϋ II nnnnn II -t A] ο Ί 494 Α7 Β7 5 3. Description of the invention () 3) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Another object of the present invention is to provide a remote monitoring system that can reduce sudden changes in light output intensity, otherwise it will cause damage to the eyes. Load and enable careful dimmer control according to the environment. The present invention has been conceived in view of the above-mentioned shortcomings in the related art, and the object of the present invention is to provide a remote monitoring system that requires a small footprint and that Use multi-function setting operation terminal | Can provide various functions required for setting * control and management * to achieve multi-function performance * and improve cost efficiency. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a display * which can be selected according to the purpose of use of the operation terminal The purpose of the present invention is to provide a remote monitoring system to prevent various types of problems that would otherwise result from mismatching. If it fails to operate. Therefore, the present invention has the advantage of improving the operability of the remote monitoring system. To achieve the above objectives * According to a first aspect of the present invention, providing a remote monitoring system includes: many operations Terminals and control terminals, each of which is assigned an address; a signal line printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs * the operation terminal and control terminal are connected to this signal line through a multi-point connection; a transfer controller is connected to Signal line; lighting load, connected to each control terminal; M and an operation section, 'provided at each operation terminal, where the transfer signal is between the transfer controller and each operation and control terminal, multiplexing by time division Method for M exchange * and a transfer signal including data corresponding to the operation of the operation section of the operation terminal to K for transmission to the pair between the addresses set by the transfer controller. 16 Paper standards are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4. Specifications (210 X 297 mm) A7 4350 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (U) Control terminals should be specified * to control the lighting load connected to the transfer controller by κ Provides a remote monitoring system, where * correspondence includes an individual control relationship for associating an operating section with a lighting load, and a simultaneous control relationship for associating an operating section with many lighting loads; control terminals include A unique address setting section * for setting a unique individual address to each terminal of many controls, and a simultaneous control address setting section for setting a simultaneous control address that is commonly assigned to many control terminals; Μ And each control terminal is provided with a terminal processing section, which is instructed to use the individual address * by the transfer signal in the terminal processing section, and the address included in the transfer signal is matched to the individual bits set in the individual address setting section. Address; or use the transfer signal in the terminal processing section to be instructed to use the control address at the same time, and the address data included in the transfer signal is set to control the address at the same time while controlling the address setting section, to control the lighting load. The intensity reaches a level of dimmer commanded by the operation section of the operation terminal. Except for individual addresses, each control terminal is assigned a simultaneous control address to M, and the simultaneous control addresses are assigned to many control terminals in common. Therefore, the control terminals assigned the same simultaneous control address actually receive the same transfer signal at the same time, so it is possible to control the intensity of the lighting load at the same time in the spring. Therefore, the remote monitoring system according to the present invention has the advantage that it can change the intensity of many groups of lighting loads without involving time lag. Furthermore, the use of individual addresses enables individual control of the lighting load. Although the lighting load is controlled individually, when the lighting load is grouped, the intensity of the lighting load is changed at the same time, thus preventing the paper size from applying the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)-\ 1 ~ ------ I--J ----- ---- I i II ^ --------- J (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau's Employees' Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed 435049 ^ A7 _B7_ V. Description of the Invention (ί 5) The user will think that the unfamiliar time lags behind. According to a second aspect of the present invention, there is also provided a remote monitoring system * as defined in the first aspect, wherein the simultaneous control address setting section can set a plurality of simultaneous control addresses. So * a single lighting load can be shared among many groups. For example, * when the lighting equipment controlled by the group is changed according to whether a room with many lighting equipment is divided into compartments, a single lighting equipment belongs to a group defined when the room is divided, and belongs to Another group defined when the room is not divided. The remote monitoring system makes it easy to set up each lighting fixture to the array. According to a third aspect of the present invention, there is further provided a remote monitoring system as defined in the third aspect, wherein the transfer controller controls the address setting at each control terminal while controlling the address setting at the same time when the signal line is set for one week. Section. Simultaneous control addresses can be assigned to each control terminal by using signal lines. Therefore, when a simultaneous control address is assigned to each control terminal * the user does not have to go to each control terminal, so it is convenient to assign a simultaneous control address to the operation of the control terminal. According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, there is also provided a remote monitoring system as defined in the third aspect * in which the transfer controller sets a control terminal that changes an individual address * based on the individual address obtained after the change New Simultaneous Control Address · Simultaneously control address setting section to any control terminal. Even if it is necessary to set a new simultaneous control address due to changing the respective control terminals of individual addresses, the user does not have to go to each control terminal *, so it is convenient to assign the simultaneous control address to the control terminals. According to the fifth aspect of the present invention *, the paper size as defined in the third aspect is also applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ~ 1 8 ~ -------- --- „---- install -------- order --------- line < Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives 435049- A7 _ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (Η;) The remote monitoring system, where the transfer controller includes a device, It is used to check whether the transmission of the simultaneous control address to the control terminal matches the setting of the control address setting section at the same time as the control terminal, and the simultaneous control of the address by the return signal from the control terminal. The remote monitoring system can prevent the noise from transmitting incorrectly and control the address to the control terminal. According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, there is also provided a remote monitoring system as defined in the third aspect *, wherein the transfer controller includes a device for checking and setting the control address at the same time when each system is started when the system is started Setting the simultaneous control address * M and setting a correct simultaneous control address to the simultaneous control address is different from the control terminal that will set the simultaneous control address to K. For example, even if the remote monitoring system is closed (for example, during a power outage), before the simultaneous control address is assigned to the control terminal, when the remote monitoring system is started, a correct simultaneous control address is assigned to each control. Terminal, by which the group dimmer can operate as expected. According to a seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided a remote monitoring system as defined in the first to sixth aspects, wherein the controller terminal tantalum includes a display section for indicating the level of the dimmer of the lighting load; M and The transfer controller polls all operation and control terminals in sequence, and each control terminal causes each control terminal to return the monitoring data about the actual dimmer level of the lighting load; updating the monitoring data based on this return will be indicated to the operation terminal The level of the dimmer in the display section and priority are given to other control terminals that are not connected to the control section and the operation section at the same time. Polling When the transfer controller receives the transfer signal from the operation terminal, it uses the control and operation terminal. Individual control terminals in the operating section. Even when many control terminals are dimmed at the same time through the use of simultaneous control addresses, this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)-19 ---- (ϊ Γ I iii ^-IIIIIII- ------ II i (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 435049 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (丨 7) It also prevents the instructions in the display section of each operation terminal from lagging behind The actual change in the intensity of the load, so the realization of the instructions in the display section involves otherwise it will happen * and the user will think that when strange, the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs employee consumer cooperative prints the lighting load without any delay according to the remote control monitor Up to the end, including the strong gradual change of each control load, will be carefully changed according to the remote control. Simultaneously change the control. * According to many operations, one signal to one signal. The degree of the terminal. The lighting load is controlled to the eyes. The visual system of the present invention has many reduced time systems and causes another terminal of the present invention to be used as a terminal and a number line to operate the line. Eight modes, as provided in the first mode, where the transfer controller transmits a decay lighting load time control terminal allocated to the control address, and when the transfer signal of the borrowed address receives the attenuation start control data | terminal The lighting negative line of the processing section attenuation during the decay time is controlled by many groups of lighting loads * which can be controlled at the same time, so as to reduce the sudden change of light intensity or otherwise load. Moreover, the ninth aspect of lighting intensity can be completed according to the environment In addition, as defined in the eighth aspect, the transfer controller can transmit and control the addresses simultaneously. Careful control of lighting can be completed for the group to receive the group lighting load, causing the lighting intensity of a group to quickly The lighting intensity changes slowly. The tenth aspect * provides a remote monitoring system * including control terminals * each of which is assigned an address; the operation terminal and the control terminal are connected to a signal line through a multi-point connection and an M connection; a lighting load Connected to each control terminal; M and this paper size are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 20 ---------- 111 1 -------------- 1 III (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed on paper standards of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) 4 35 0 4 9 ', A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (18) An operation section is provided at each operation terminal, where the transfer signal is at the transfer controller and each operation and control terminal The time division multiplexing method is used to exchange between M and a transfer signal including data corresponding to the operation of the operation section of the operation terminal is transmitted to the control terminal specified by the correspondence set between the addresses of the transfer controller. To control the lighting load connected to the transfer controller by providing the remote control monitoring system. The kitchen should include at least one employment control relationship for connecting an operation section with a lighting load. The control terminal includes a special address setting. Section for setting a unique address to each terminal of many control terminals; data to control the time required to transmit the target dimmer level and the intensity of attenuated light to the target dimmer level After that, the transfer controller transmits the attenuation start control data to the control terminal by transferring the signal; K and the terminal processing section of each control terminal calculates the change required to attenuate the intensity of the lighting load to the target dimmer level during the decay time. Dark rate, and attenuates the intensity of the lighting load to the target dimmer level based on the dimming rate when the attenuation data is received to start controlling the data *. Since the intensity of the lighting load can be changed gradually, preventing sudden changes in the lighting intensity will cause it to impose a load on the eyes *, and the lighting can be carefully controlled according to the environment. Based on the eleventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided a remote monitoring system as defined in the tenth aspect, in which the transfer controller can transmit a decay time which varies according to each control terminal. For many lighting loads, it can complete the careful control of lighting, which causes the intensity of some lighting loads to change rapidly, and causes the intensity of other lighting loads to change slowly. -21-! ------------ Installation * ------- Order --------- According to (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 435049 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (19) The Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs has developed a multi-homed address M minus, and when the zone is decremented, the root boundary system delimits Xu Gongqiang; The controllable realm and the one position system, the address is set to set the target, and the sample segment of the fixed light control terminal internal speed address is connected to the end cause mode. Each mode area is set to reduce the control time. The segmentation system is based on the polymorphic ten for the control of time-varying and time-varying control areas. The ten roots can be exercised in the first place, and the variable control of the control can be used as the same. In the first paragraph, each piece of material needs to be changed from time to time, and it can be changed in the contracting system in Ruan District. When the water is sufficient to the time of need, the same person will be responsible for making Zheru available for control. In the same way, you can provide one device by one device, and provide one set of optical data. The standard section can be provided in the picture, and the model can be provided. The degree of control is different, and the package is controlled by the control unit of the position control unit, which is weak, strong, and accurate. Therefore, it should be controlled at the beginning by using Ricoh. The sample-to-root-to-state control is the same as the required completion and reduction of the sub-address rate control load, which is the complete state in the second control, the subtraction. The standard end position speed negative control. Μ Forty at the time, the same son loses the g. The dark mode of the system is ten, borrowing tenth, and passing the same end to the end of the round when the reference control becomes the control of the model. Enclosed system, the end of the water system to pass the child number package. Mind-to-mind is to be controlled by a packet controller to control its terminal. At the same time, it can produce savvy visual fading. The reduction of the release of the control supervisor, the control end of the supervisory control, the reduction of the control, the transfer of the transmission, the completion of the control, the reduction of the control, the control of the negative control, the shift from the negative control to the shift, a negative borrowing, and the remote control of the water, Change the data according to the remote control, change the target, change the data, change the device to the root of the child, change the root of the photo, and take the root in Duan Kaiguang. -—— ^ 装 -------- Order --------- Line · ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 22 ^ 35049 ^ Α7 Β7 --------- — — i — equipment -------- order --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Remote control monitoring system of invention description (20), in which the operating state of the associated load is operated; the operating state of the transfer controller is transmitting the control data load, and the switching operation and transfer controller are equipped. There is a display method of the display section, which is ready for operation. * It can be configured according to the use of the operation terminal. The remote monitoring system according to the fifteenth aspect of the present invention, wherein the transfer, for setting and checking the use of the display section as a terminal purpose, select the remote monitoring according to the sixteenth aspect of the present invention, the system, wherein Remote device for switching load control methods based on many operating terminal characteristics. Therefore, the display method is selected and it is convenient for the remote monitoring system according to the seventeenth aspect of the present invention. Among them, the control method, in which, if at least one of the switches is activated in the operation section, negative and a later operation priority control Fang Xianhua, control the load by μ. A load that is shared only among many switches. The terminal includes a display section for indication, which is used to indicate the display section of the terminal as obtained from the control terminal; M method switching device * for selective switching to display as a terminal For each operation section. Therefore, the display method is selected, and it is convenient to provide a display method in which the controller and an external device exchange signals as defined in the fourteenth aspect. Therefore • According to the operation method, and the system configuration is convenient. In addition, as in the fourteenth aspect, the control and monitoring system includes a control method switching operation section it for nirvana * selection, which can be configured according to the purpose of use of the operation terminal. * Provide the method as defined in the sixteenth aspect including a 0N-priority control party to share the load between the switch and the load; and the interruption of the load by borrowing another switch will be invalid, and the method will be used to open a later action.翮 优 0N- Priority control method is assigned to be excluded from the interruption action of another opening. 23 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 4 35 Q 4 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (21) The printing industry can be used in the printing industry for the consumer cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. When it is used as a well-defined location rotor, the production team exchanges the functions of the storage industry and the control system. It is controlled by the same model as the original one, and it can be polymorphic, and can be controlled by the cooperative model. Seven-packed, eight-end-manufactured non-exercise mode, when, one, shape ten parts for ten and control, if you can have one end with the same address, the same address, the same operation, the outer operation device, the number of the mobile device, and the number For the address, the information can be integrated into a unified system, and integrated into a sub-system. If the control has a transfer problem, if there is a terminal control, the donor is turned over for the purpose of setting a dumping questionnaire for distribution control. Tong Ming uses the system to choose the structure to promote the company. When the supervisor of the news is operating, the sons and daughters are sent together to make the other control and selection system. System, storage sub-type remote control, and multiple accessions are allowed. The sample transfer method will be used to store the sample. The sample will be injected to the end of the site. This state will be stored in the Chinese state or it will be changed to every match. Bit material. One to the same cause, one of its eighth system, and its nine-way device can deliver ten cents per match. Now ten, borrow ten, whether there are two burdens on the end of the asset system, which are sub-consolidated and comprehensively checked, the first system is controlled, and the first is equipped with the second. The type of control and the joint control of the blind and unified vision of the relocation or the invention of Fangming and Fangming, and the control of the carrier M can be issued, customized, issued, and issued. When the burden is assigned, the control of this control is to set the control of the control of the control of the control of the control of the control of the control of the capital, the relocation of the site of this site to the remote control of the remote basis of the data. The root of the root, the shape of the root shift. At the remote end of the remote site, the loan is borrowed at the designated end. Click on the points; Transfer Control Interval II — I 11111111 ^ II — I — II ^ «— — — III — — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Duty printing of A7 B7 by employee cooperation of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (22) Load, without involving the silly point of time lag. Furthermore, if individual addresses * loads are used, they can be individually controlled. Therefore, if individual loads wish to be grouped and controlled at the same time * they will be controlled by the M peers in order to prevent the occurrence of time lags that users will find unfamiliar. According to a twenty-first aspect of the present invention *, a remote monitoring system as defined in the twentieth aspect is provided, wherein the operation terminal is provided with an address setting memory, wherein the bit position is associated with a single address. A bit flag is set to any bit position in the address setting memory > and an address corresponding to the bit position is used as the address of the operation terminal. When many addresses are set up and shipped, the memory capacity can be reduced, because the enabling cost is reduced. Also, the time required to set the address can be shortened. According to a twenty-second aspect of the present invention, there is provided a remote monitoring system as defined in the twenty-first aspect, wherein the load is a lighting load, and upon receiving a switch corresponding to actuating a switch related to group control In the case of data, the transfer controller sequentially transmits a transfer signal, including the target brightness and water dimension of each lighting load associated with the group control and a different address. Subsequently, the transfer controller transmits a transfer signal, including a simultaneous control address and control data, for instructing the lighting load to start a control operation. Therefore, the operating terminals assigned to the same simultaneous control address actually receive the same transfer signal at the same time and start to control the lighting load at the same timing during the night, to prevent the time lag that the user will think is strange. According to the twenty-third aspect of the present invention, there is provided a remote monitoring system as defined in the twenty-second aspect, wherein a terminal processing section provided with a switch * with a switch at the operation terminal is included in the transfer signal The materials sold on the site match the size of this paper to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 25 1 ----- 1 II ---, '-------- Order ·- -n JI < Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 4 3δ0 4 9 «ΐ Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (23) Control bit Information. According to the remote control, one display, one transparent and one control are set in the connection, and the MlLl tzfiff is controlled in the setting of the capacity-linking section, which is blocked when corresponding to the address. Therefore, the monitoring system of the present invention can be blocked and connected to the signal line operation terminal. The indicator can indicate the touch panel, the control section, its fixed mode, and some of the operations of the touch panel to perform the processing of the section. The phase transfer signal includes a switch control load corresponding to one of the hopes of operating the switch. Twenty-four aspects, provided as defined in the first aspect, wherein the operation terminal includes: a setting operation terminal, and it includes an operation section and a display section; it has: display characters and graphics superimposed on the display Screen, M and selectable between a setting mode and an operating mode. The setting process corresponds to an operation assigned to an operating section within the display. In the operating mode, the response operation process includes K and contains at least the use function. Twenty-five aspects, the system, one of which is the same, and the other is a function of opening and closing in large and small sections. Provide media accessories such as those printed in the second (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). As an attached switch box, the remote control monitoring as defined in the first aspect of the present invention is equipped with an individual address equal to the opening and closing position of the box, which can be set in twenty-six aspects. The system, where the control address corresponds to In the function of the negative section, the installation section is equal to the attachable section section, and the M section is provided with a control section, and the installation space of the fourteenth aspect is a large square series wiring to this installation section; Κ And Yu M screwed in. The twenty-fifth aspect has points in the setting mode. One can enter it as a pair. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). 26 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs wisdom Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau. V. Invention Description (24) In the operation mode, the function of starting or interrupting the load of the individual address allocation section is operated by the user. According to the twentieth aspect of the present invention * there is also provided a remote monitoring system as defined in the twenty-sixth aspect, wherein the control section in the setting mode has an address equivalent to a switch assigned to a position corresponding to many loads The address is a function of a pair of many corresponding group addresses to the operation section, and the function of making many loads into the same state; in the operation mode, the operation section of the user operation group address allocation is started or interrupted. Brief Description of the Drawings Figure 1 is a block diagram showing the main elements of a remote monitoring system according to the first embodiment of the present invention; Figure 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of using a remote monitoring system; Figure 3 is an explanatory diagram 2 shows the control program based on the operation of the remote monitoring system shown in FIG. 2: Group 4 is an explanatory diagram; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram control program; Circle 6 is an outline diagram showing a remote control using a third spring case according to the present invention. An example of a monitoring system; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a control program under which the remote monitoring system shown in FIG. 6 operates; FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of a conventional remote monitoring system; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram, 10 shows the operation of the remote monitoring system; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the control program according to the second embodiment of the present invention based on the operation of the remote monitoring system shown in FIG. 8; According to the Thai paper standard, the national standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 297 mm) -27-(Please read the unintentional matter on the back before filling this page) ---- Install! ---- Order ------ II _ Taste! Α7 _Β7_ V. The control procedure of the invention description (25); Figure 11 is an explanation, showing the procedure according to which the remote control monitoring system shown in Figure 6 performs group control; Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of the remote control monitoring system. Another example; Figure 13 is a block circle showing a conventional remote monitoring system. Figure 14 is an example of a transmission signal used by the system in Figure 13; Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a remote control in Figure 13 An example of the display indicated by the display unit of the monitoring system; FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display indicated by the display unit of the remote monitoring system of FIG. 13; FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example shown in FIG. 13 Example of the display indicated by the element in the remote control monitoring system of the remote control system; 圔 18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display indicated by the display unit of the remote monitoring system in circle 13; FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a Fig. 13 shows an example of the display indicated by the display unit of the remote monitoring system; Fig. 20 is an explanatory diagram * shows an example of the display indicated by the display unit of the remote monitoring system of Fig. 13; Fig. 21 is an explanatory diagram * shows the garden 2 Shown in far The control program according to which the monitoring system operates; Figure 22 is the data table on which the remote monitoring system operates as shown in Figure 21; Figure 23 is the modified data table on which the remote monitoring system is operating as shown in Figure 2; Figure 24 is an explanation Fig. * Shows the control program according to which the remote monitoring system is operated as shown in Fig. 23; Fig. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing an address in the bitmap format of the sixth embodiment of the present invention; this paper size is applicable to the country of China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Installation ------ Order ·! ------ Consumer Consumption of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative 28 — A7 B7 Printed by the consumer consumption cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (26) FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram * showing the t-th embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram, shown in FIG. 26 operation; FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing an eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation performed in FIG. 28; FIG. 30 is a block plaque; Setting operation terminal of remote monitoring system of the embodiment; FIG. 31 is a block Figure • shows an example of the configuration of the remote monitoring system; Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view showing the setting operation terminals used in the remote monitoring system; Figure 33 is an explanatory diagram • a monitor unit for the remote monitoring system Example of the indicated display cell; Figure 34 is an explanatory diagram * for showing an example of the indication display in the display unit of the remote monitoring system; FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram * for an example of the indication display of the display unit in the remote monitoring system; FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing an example indicated by a display unit of a remote monitoring system; FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an indication displayed by a display unit of a remote monitoring system; FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram, Fig. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of display indicated by a display unit of a remote monitoring system; Fig. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of display indicated by a monitor unit of a remote monitoring system; The paper unit of the display unit refers to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 29 ------------ Installation -------- Order --- ------ According to 请 (Please read the first Note: Please fill out this page again) A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. An example of the display of the invention description (27); Figure 41 is an explanatory diagram for display on the display unit of the remote monitoring system Example; Fig. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of display indicated by a display unit of a remote monitoring system; M and Figs. 43A to 43C are explanatory diagrams showing an example of display indicated by a display unit of a remote monitoring system; DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT First Embodiment FIG. 1 shows a remote monitoring system of the present invention according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 shows a transfer controller 30 and a control terminal 32. The transfer controller 30 includes a transfer processing section 20, which includes a microprocessor. The transfer processing section 20 is connected to a signal line Ls through a transfer driver circuit 21 to M. The operation of the transfer processing section 20 is defined by a program stored in a program flash memory 22 including a ROM. The form of the corresponding M table between the terminals is stored in the rewriteable data memory 23. Conveniently, the data memory 23 contains non-volatile memory such as EEPROM. During the operation of the transfer controller 30, data exchanged between the transfer controller 30 and the terminals is stored in a working memory 24 including, for example, a RAM. The control terminals 32 are for the purpose of dimming, and each control terminal 32 is connected to a lighting fixture 33 (see FIG. 2), and the intensity of light output from a lighting load provided in the lighting fixture 33 is controlled by K. Therefore * the control terminal 32 according to the embodiments will be hereinafter referred to as "dimmer terminal". In the case of using an incandescent lamp as a lighting load, a triac including a triac is used. This paper standard applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 30 n * ^ 1 HI I —Γ n) I nnh port, ----- line γ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 _ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (28) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The dimmer is incorporated in the dimmer terminal 32. In the case of using a luminescent lamp as a lighting load, the dimmer of the lighting fixture The dimmer incorporates the output dimmer data for K control. In particular, if the luminaire 33 includes incandescent lamps, the dimmer control section 14 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a dimmer. In contrast, if the luminaire 33 includes a fluorescent light, and the dimmer control section 14 has the function of generating dimmer data. The printing is printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and has been described with relevant technologies. Ls to M is connected to the transfer controller 30, and transfer The signal is transmitted through the time division multiplexing transmission method between the transfer controller 30 and the dimmer terminal 32. Each dimmer terminal 32 includes a terminal processing section 10 including a microcomputer. The terminal processing section 10 A transmission / reception circuit 11 is connected to the signal line Ls. The transmission / reception circuit 11 receives a bipolar transfer signal, transmits it on the signal line Ls, and depolarizes the signal thus received (or makes the signal undergo a full Wave rectification). The rectified signal is transmitted to a terminal processing section 10. Moreover, the * dimmer terminal 32 is also equipped with a power circuit for extracting power from the transferred signal transmitted from the signal line Ls to M. From the terminal processing section 10 Return to the signal of the transfer controller 30, and use the transmitting / receiving circuit 11 to convert M to one of the current mode signals, and send the W mode signal to M to the signal line Ls. 0 The dimmer terminal 32 is provided with another address setting. Section 12 and a simultaneous control address setting section 13. The simultaneous control address setting section 13 contains non-volatile memory, such as EEPROM, and the individual address setting section 12 includes a dual in-line Off or non-volatile memory. One of the individual addresses set in the individual address setting section 12 is unique to the corresponding individual dimmer terminal 32. Even the 31-sheet paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS > A4 specifications) (210 X 297 mm), 4350 厶 9, ·, A7 _B7_ V. Inventor Duming (23) The individual address M of the dimmer terminal 32 connected to the signal line Ls is set to M to avoid overlapping. Contrast *-A single simultaneous control address is set in common in the simultaneous control address setting section 13 connected to the respective dimmer terminals 32 connected to the signal line Ls. Only one other address is set to K in the individual address setting section 12, but many simultaneous control addresses can be set in the same address setting section. The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Employee Consumption Cooperative, printed 13 ° According to the terminal processing terminal 32 In other words, if the light control in paragraph 12 is set in the group control material and allocated by the same address of the dimmer such as Μ and the target address of the target optical receiver at the same time *, the signal is received according to this implementation. The segment 10 of the line L s transmission selects individual addresses. In the case where the mode data transfer signal is included in the setting of the individual address control section 1 4 control horizontal type * control addresses are stored between the control section 1 4 control and the * dimmer end simultaneously control the address. Brightness level command is 3 2. Subsequently, a number of dimmer terminals are provided to the dimmer end to control the lighting load, for example, many dimmers transfer signals. There is a match between the mode data included in the transfer signal, the address or the simultaneous control address as a dimmer, and the address data in a different mode. There is a match between the individual address setting area and the terminal processing section. 1 0 lighting load. Set the mode data to M. If the address information included in the transfer signal is used in the matching • terminal processing section 10, the load borrows lighting. The sub 32 has two types of addresses; that is, a command issued at the completion of the mode control (ie, group control) to the start of the dimmer operation for the purpose of the mode control by using the sub 32; that is, the same time The control address 32 actually receives the dimmer start command at the same time without involving a time lag. More specifically * the root terminal 32 can be controlled simultaneously by using the address (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -------- Order -------- II-This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 32 4 3 5 0 4 9 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of invention (30) As shown in Figure 2, many reductions The optical device terminal 32 (three terminals in FIG. 2) is connected to the transfer controller 30 through a multipoint connection through a signal line Ls. The operation terminals 31a and 31b are connected to the signal line Ls *. Each of the operation terminals 31a is connected to a single lighting load (as described earlier * the lighting fixture 33 includes a lighting load), and each operation The terminal 31b is associated with many lighting loads. Each operation terminal 31a and 32b includes an on / off switch Sa for instructing a lighting load to be illuminated or extinguished by M; a UP switch Sb * for instructing the lighting load to increase the intensity of its output light; a DOWN switch Sc, for instructing the lighting load to reduce the intensity of light; M and a display section LD, which include a plurality of light-emitting diodes aligned in a single file * and indicate the intensity of the light output from the corresponding lighting load by a number of lighting light-emitting diodes ( Dimmer status). Although not shown in the figure, a display terminal * for each type of basic indication of the operating state of the lighting load * is connected to the signal line Ls as needed in order to closely monitor the operating state of the lighting load in the monitoring room. The operation terminal 31a associated with a single lighting load is called "individual dimmer switch". The operating terminal associated with many lighting loads = 31b is called "mode dimmer switch". When any one of the switches Sa to Sc of one of the individual dimmer switches 31 a is actuated, the transfer controller 30 transmits operation information about the switch thus pressed to a single dimmer terminal previously associated with the switch 31 a in a preset relationship. 32. The on / of f switch Sa commands the start or stop of the lighting load. If the UP switch Sb or the DOWN switch Sc is actuated, and the same lighting load is on, the intensity of the light output from the lighting load is adjusted accordingly. For example, if the DOWN switch Sc is depressed * the dimmer terminal 32 is instructed to start reducing the intensity of light. Applicable to China Paper Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) on this paper scale 33 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -r Outfit -------- Order --- ------ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 4 350 49 ·· * A7 _ B7____ V. Description of the invention (31) When the DOWN switch Sc is released, the dimmer terminal 32 is instructed to stop decreasing The intensity of light. The UP switch Sb and the DOWN switch Sc transfer signals and instruct the dimmer terminal 32 by using two parameters; that is, the moment when the switch is initially depressed and the moment when the 阚 is released. Upon receiving the transfer signal output by the user depressing the UP switch or opening the II SC, the dimmer terminal 32W and the time have passed at a predetermined rate, the time from the beginning of changing the light intensity 'until the time of changing the light intensity is stopped. Time, change the intensity of the light output from the self-lighting load. In fact, the intensity of the light output from the self-lighting load changes gradually. The amount of light intensity change at each step and the rate of change in light intensity per second, cause the output of the self-lighting load to change. The light is set in a way that changes continuously. When the opening mode Sa of the dimmer switch 31b in the operating mode is shifted, the signal M is transmitted in the manner shown in circle 3 * to the respective dimmers in the group. Terminal 32. In the configuration of the remote monitoring system shown in Figure 3, the mode dimmer switch 31b is assigned to the same simultaneous control of dimmer terminals 32 (1), 32 (2), and 32 (3). Address. When the switch Sd of the group dimmer switch 31b is pressed, an operation signal 0P1 for controlling the light intensity is transmitted to the transfer controller 30. The transfer controller 30 sequentially transmits the control signals CN11, CN12, and CN13 to the dimmer Sub-32 (1), 32 (2), and 32 (3), each of which includes a level of light brightness (dimmer) as a control selling material. More specifically * The control signal CN 11 contains the (1) of the individual address is used as the address data, and the target brightness level of the lighting load connected to the dimmer terminal 32 (1) is also included as the control data. Each dimmer terminal 32 stores the visual brightness Standard. In this paper standard, China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) applies. 34! —-- Γ .-- I I--Θ Packing — — 11 Order —! (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page for further information.) 蟓 435049m A7 B7 Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs «V. Description of Invention (32) After the control signals CN11, CN12 'and CN13 have been transmitted through the signal line Ls, the controller 30 is transferred Through the signal line Ls, a transfer signal that allocates a simultaneous control address (that is, the control signal CN14) is transmitted in the group control mode. The dimmer terminals 32 (1), 32 (2) ·, and 32 (3) actually receive control at the same time Signal CH14. Therefore, the dimmer terminals 32 (1) '32 (2), and 32 (3) actually start at the same time _ dark lighting node Through this procedure, regardless of the number of dimmer terminals 32, the operation information is actually transmitted from the mode dimmer switch 31b to each dimmer terminal 32 * at the same time without involving time lag. The operation signal 0P1 and the control signal CN11 It is a transfer signal to C1H4. As long as many simultaneous control addresses are assigned to a single dimmer terminal 32, the dimmer terminal 32 can be grouped in different arrays. For example, a conference room or a briefing room can be used as a single Room, or when divided into many compartments. In this case * the range of lighting loads subject to group control will be changed. The lighting loads included in one group must also be joined to the other group. If individual dimmer terminals 32 can be assigned only one simultaneous control address, the dimmer terminals 32 can be included in only one group. The remote monitoring system according to this example enables individual dimmer terminals 32 to belong to several groups. Even if one non-dimmer terminal M, which is a heavy day mode, is temporarily stored in many groups, no problem occurs, thereby enabling dynamic and easy setting of group control. As stated above, * since many simultaneous control addresses can be assigned to a single dimmer terminal 32 * each dimmer terminal 32 can be included in several different groups. For example, a conference room or a briefing room can be used as a single room or divided into many compartments. In this case, the range of the lighting load that is controlled by the group is changed to M. In a single group of lighting loads, this paper size applies to National Standards (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 35 I} I— II Γ ^ II n I. (· I f IIIIIIIIIII ^ I ( Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 435049 ^ A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (ϋ) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) M must be divided into different groups. If individual dimmer terminals 32 can only be assigned-control address at the same time, the dimmer terminal 32 can only be included in one group. According to the remote monitoring system of the first example, individual dimmer terminals 32 can belong to several groups. Even one other dimmer Terminals W are temporarily stored in many groups, and no problem occurs. 'This enables dynamic and capacity setting group control. ° Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shelley Consumer Cooperative, indicating that the line will be controlled by the group. The group data of each group is bet on the data memory 23 of the transfer controller 30. The group data can be borrowed from the transfer controller or from a set of setting devices, and the transfer signal is transmitted through the signal line Ls. Set to M. For example, if you change the subtractor terminal 32 of the group (that is, change the group information), because of the change in the layout of the room, the 'simultaneous control address must be assigned to the dimmer terminal 32 again and the simultaneous control address is assigned to each The dimmer terminal 32 is a method of simultaneously controlling the address to the dimmer terminal 32 through the signal line Ls * by transmission, or by another transmission medium · Borrowing _ simultaneously controlling the address to the dimmer terminal 32 According to the latter method, the simultaneous control address is prepared by a setting device provided separately from the remote monitoring system, and the simultaneous control address is controlled by using an optical wireless signal or a connection line connected to the dimmer terminal 32. PreM is transmitted to the dimmer terminal 32. In contrast, according to the previous method, the simultaneous control address is transmitted from the transfer controller 30 to the dimmer terminal 32 through the signal line Ls. The setting that the line is controlled by the group Or when the dimmer terminal 32 is changed, the 'transfer controller 30 detects the currently used and assigned an existing simultaneous control address to the simultaneous control address of each dimmer terminal 32. In other words, the remote monitoring system is In this state, the system enables the setting group control (that is, the system is started in the group setting mode). If a command is provided (the manufacturer applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x 297mm) -36 _ 4350 49 '' A7 ___B7 V. Description of the invention (34) The outside is assigned > for associating the mode dimmer switch 31b with the lighting load (reducer terminal 32), it will automatically calculate a It has “simultaneous control address” and the calculated simultaneous control address K address setting signal is transmitted to the respective dimmer terminal 32 and temporarily stored in it. By using the upper transfer controller 30, it is automatically selected An existing simultaneous control address, and the address thus selected is temporarily stored in the respective dimmer terminal 32. Therefore, group control can be set without the need to know the simultaneous control address. Moreover, as long as the dimmer terminal 32 'which selects the row allocation and simultaneous control address is selected, the transfer controller 30 operates' for allocation and simultaneously control the address to the respective dimmer terminal 32. Therefore, the operation is more convenient than the operation for allocating and controlling addresses to the respective dimmer terminals 32 at the same time. Even if the number of the dimmer terminals 32 is increased in association with the extension of the remote monitoring system, or when the individual address of the existing dimmer terminal 32 is changed, the control address must also be allocated to another provided Dimmer terminal 32, or a dimmer terminal 32 whose individual address is changed. For this purpose, the dimmer terminal 32 provided separately or the dimmer terminal 32 with an individual address change sends an interrupt signal during the full-time polling operation to inform the transfer controller 30 of the increase in the dimmer terminal, or Changes in individual addresses. The transfer controller 30 uses the address to set the signal transfer wheel to control the address to all the dimmer terminals 32 at the same time, thereby assigning the simultaneous control address to the dimmer terminal 32. It has been informed that the existing simultaneous control address of the dimmer terminal 32 of the transfer controller 30 is determined through the above-mentioned processing operation, and the simultaneous control address thus determined is temporarily stored. As mentioned above, in the case where individual addresses are assigned to K to the new dimmer terminal 32, or individual addresses assigned to the dimmer terminal 32 are changed to K, the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 is used for the transfer of f paper dimensions. Specifications (210 X 297 mm) ---- ------- 1.!--Decoration I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order *. Staff Consumption of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative -37-435049 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (33) The controller 30 automatically determines the corresponding control address corresponding to the group in which the dimmer terminal 32 is located, and so determines by using the transfer signal > allocation Simultaneously control the address to the dimmer terminal 32 * so it is very convenient to set the operation of the simultaneous control address. As described above, in the case where the simultaneous control address is allocated to the dimmer terminal 32 by the transfer signal, the actual simultaneous control address may be incorrectly transferred to the dimmer terminal 32 and enter the signal line U. Under the influence of noise, another different simultaneous control address can be set to the dimmer terminal 32. Of course * in this case * a group of dimmer operations other than the intended operation can be performed. In the case of this case, the address is controlled at the same time as will be explained under Setting K to prevent this problem according to the procedure. The transfer controller 30 allocates the simultaneous control address to the dimmer terminal 32 in cooperation with the identification information on the simultaneous control address. The identification data corresponds to the inspection and data. It is formed by borrowing the individual addresses of the respective dimmer terminals 32 and setting the simultaneous control address. The simultaneous control address includes 16 data groups. Each data The group contains 8 bits. Before assigning the simultaneous control address to the dimmer terminal 32, the transfer controller 30 performs a polling operation, and requests each of the dimmer terminals 32 to return it recently by using the identification data set by the transfer signal, so as to obtain inspection and The data includes the recently assigned individual addresses of the individual dimmer terminals and the individual identification information including the tritium identification data, as well as the recently set simultaneous control assets. The inspection and data (ie identification data) thus obtained are compared with the identification data stored in the data memory 23. If there is a match between the identification data stored in the data memory 23 and the identification data thus obtained; that is, * if the simultaneous control address corresponding to a certain address is exactly the same as the simultaneous control address set by K, then There is no need to re-assign the paper size to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -38-(谙 Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · I —----- Order --- ----- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 350 49 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) At the same time, control the address to the dimmer terminal 32. For this reason, simultaneous control address allocation is not implemented. Only when there is a difference between the identification data stored in the data memory 23 and the obtained identification data, the simultaneous control address must be allocated to the dimmer terminal 32. In this case, the transfer control signal is used to transmit and allocate the simultaneous control address to the dimmer terminal 32, so as to ensure that the transfer control signal is controlled by the transfer signal. After checking the control data at the same time, and allocating the control data to all the terminals at the same time, * it is planned to check and exchange the data sets of all the transfer wheels, and improve the reliability of the simultaneous control data by using K. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. If the remote monitoring system is turned off before the transfer controller 30 has finished allocating and controlling the address to the dimmer terminal 32, the control data should actually be activated and the control data may not match. Simultaneous control addresses are assigned to the respective dimmer terminals 32. Of course, a group dimmer operation other than the expected group dimmer operation is performed. As long as the transfer controller 30 checks the address allocated to the dimmer terminal 32 connected to the signal line Ls while turning on the control address, such a defective operation can be prevented. If the simultaneous control address is different from an address that should be assigned to the dimmer terminal 32, the transfer controller 30 reassigns a correct simultaneous control address to the dimmer terminal 32 by using the transfer signal. Or, during a polling operation usually performed by the transfer controller 30, the transfer controller 30 may check the simultaneous control address. According to the light output data returned from the dimmer terminal 32 by the polling operation performed by the transfer controller 30 within the group, the display of the display section LD of the dimmer switch 31b of each group is changed to M. The actual emission of light from the lighting load in this group lags behind the appearance of the LD indication in the display section 31b of the group dimmer switch. Users may consider this time lag to be unfamiliar. 39 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm): ·) 3 4 3 «Explanation A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (37) When the light output from the lighting load in this group changes, The transfer controller 30 refers to a group data table stored in the data memory 23, and polls the individual dimmer terminals 23 of the group, which precedes the other terminals. If the MH is polled, it will poll the dimmer terminal 3 2 that will be controlled by the group. * The dimmer terminal 32 returns information about the light output from the lighting load in the group. Therefore, the time lag between the actual lighting of the lighting load and the appearance of the LD indication in the display section of the group dimmer switch 31b is prevented * so that the indication display is enabled without involving otherwise it would occur and be considered by the user Time lag. Second Embodiment In the case where the lighting fixture is illuminated at night in the room, if the light intensity of the lighting fixture increases momentarily, a heavy load is applied to the eyes. The damper terminal 32 for individual control purpose is provided with an attenuation function for gradually increasing the intensity of light output from the lighting load when the on / off switch Sa of the individual damper switch 31a is actuated, thereby providing a second implementation example. According to the remote control monitoring system of this embodiment, the basic configuration is equal to the remote control monitoring system of the first embodiment, so its explanation and illustration are omitted here. The data temporarily stored in the data memory 23 of the transfer controller 30 is related to the degree of illumination corresponding to the lighting load of the dimmer terminal 32 when the on / off switch Sa of the individual dimmer switch 31a is actuated (ie, the target Dimmer level). The dimmer level information can be set by an individual dimmer switch 31a or by a mode setting device which will be described later. The operation of the individual control according to the second embodiment will now be described with reference to the example shown in FIG. 4. In this example, the intensity of the lighting load of the dimmer terminal 32 is within three seconds by the individual dimmer switch 3 1 a (this period is called “fading (please read the matter of the king on the back before filling this page)) I -------- Order, ----- II 1 ^-„· The paper size printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297) (Centi) 40 Λ Λ _ V. Description of the invention (38) Α7 Β7 ΰ Ming Zhao Da 6 up to load 31 Zeng Ming 阚 M opened to the device Γ Yingguangjian to the time to reduce the time to see if the water must be clear X -T ο All 10 neutron terminal devices are shown in the figure. The light and water are attenuator. And the light I) is the device of the head of the minus shoshuma, a light system g 0 the target of the light reduction system h ij device light Reduction of riu 〇 The number of connection and closing of the pressure is in place ο The time of reduction 3 S wide open Table 1 Loss of transmission 3 1 3 The switch is pressed by the light signal to be closed by a S > 0 睇 器 (6 Please—, S shuts off the water ϊ Shifter, Jt turns light 爿 I ...... sleep 0 0, on standard ap «n 1X o Head 3 set to open the pre-light indicator to indicate the loss of a meter pass o L 3 device: control and transfer signal to control the transmission of the sub-end device light reduction 2 3 sub-end device light reduction 0 money negative photo transmission 0 ¾ 30 light device control light control reduction Move to β after τρπτι I start, then, 2 ο 3 32 sub-signal 1- " ο An input terminal light is reduced to the received and the memory is stored in the memory M to the water level light reduction g When receiving the ON signal CHon from the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the dimmer terminal 32 starts the lighting load at the dimmer level 0¾. The transfer controller 30 transmits an attenuation including the decay time (= three seconds) Start signal CNfe to the dimmer terminal 32. When the attenuation start signal CNfe is received, the dimmer terminal 32 calculates to increase the intensity of the lighting load within three seconds from the dimmer level 0¾ to the target dimmer level (60¾). The required dimming rate. Based on the dimming rate thus calculated * the dimmer terminal 32 performs a so-called fade-in operation, which gradually increases the intensity of the lighting load by referring to FIG. 5. Lighting load Extinction. When the on / off switch Sa of the individual dimmer switch 31a is pressed and the lighting load is at the target dimmer level (60¾) to M lighting, the paper format of the individual dimmer is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) 41 ---------- 111 I ----- J — — Order ----- i_ ^ < (Please read the precautions on the back of Jing before filling out this page) 435049 ^ A7 ____B7__ V. Description of the invention (39) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 31a transmission means pressing 〇n / 〇 The operation signal ff switch Sa of the ff switch Sa is transferred to the transfer controller 30. The transfer controller 30 transmits a level signal indicating the level (0 S;) of the target dimmer to the individual address of the individual dimmer switch 31a, and the operation signal OPoff dimmer terminal 32 has been inputted. The level of the target dimmer received by the dimmer terminal 32 is stored in the memory. Secondly, the transfer controller 30 transmits the attenuation start signal CNfe including the attenuation time (three seconds) to the dimmer terminal 32. Upon receiving the attenuation start signal CNfe, the dimmer terminal 32 calculates the dimming rate required to reduce the intensity of the lighting load from the dimmer level 60¾ to the eye dimmer level 0X within three seconds. Based on the dimming rate thus calculated, the dimmer terminal 32 performs a gradual aging operation to gradually reduce the level of the dimmer of the lighting load. Simultaneously with the transmission attenuation start signal CNfe, the transfer controller 30 starts counting the attenuation time. At the time when the transfer controller 30 has finished counting the decay time, an OFF signal CNoff for the load of the center lighting is transmitted to the dimmer terminal 32. Daylight OFF signal CHoff's dimmer terminal 32 interrupts the lighting load. Printed by the staff of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Yellow Cooperative, as described above, by pressing the on / off switch Sa of the individual dimmer switch 31a, corresponding to the level and decay time of the target dimmer terminal 32 Μ The calculated dimming rate gradually changes the level of the dimmer of the lighting load. Therefore, the intensity of the light output from the lighting load is gradually changed, thereby reducing the load on the eyes due to the dazzling, and allowing the lighting to be carefully controlled according to the environment. The user may wish to gradually change the level of the dimmer of the lighting load at one location, but quickly change the level of the dimmer of the lighting load at another location. For this purpose, the decay time can be from one lighting load to another lighting load. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) -42-4350 49 > ^ A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention ( 40) Μ arbitrarily set * to enable careful control of lighting according to the environment. The third embodiment (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The lighting fixtures arranged in a wide area such as a conference room * are only located at, for example, the 0ΗP to M projection location, and the brightness is reduced to Μ until it changes. It is lower than the brightness of lighting appliances located elsewhere in the room. In this case * complete the mode control • borrow the collective control of many lighting loads * to achieve the desired lighting. Even when controlling in this mode, if the intensity of the light output from the lighting load is suddenly changed * the occupants of the room will be dazzled * so a heavy load will be applied to the eyes. In the third embodiment, the attenuation function is applied to the mode control to prevent this problem. When implementing the attenuation function in the mode control, the light output from many lighting loads that have been controlled by the mode must be considered, and the increase must be started or stopped at the same time. The mode control in the conventional remote monitoring system * has received the operation signal from the operation terminal for the purpose of the mode control transfer controller, refer to a mode table with modes temporarily stored therein, and sequentially transmit control data to the respective dimmer Terminal. Therefore, a time lag occurs at the timing when the dimmer terminal starts or stops changing the intensity of the light output from the lighting load. Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The essential example is to implement model control according to the following procedures. FIG. 6 shows a configuration of a remote monitoring system according to a third embodiment. This system differs from the system according to the first embodiment in that only one operation terminal (hereinafter referred to as a "mode switch") 31ci for mode control and an operation terminal for collectively starting or interrupting a lighting load in the group (Hereinafter referred to as a “group switch”) 31d is connected to the transfer controller 30 through a signal line Ls to M. Mode This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 mm) ~ ~ 2 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (41) The data is stored in the data memory 23 of the transfer controller 30 in advance. The mode data contains the individual addresses of the respective dimmer terminals 32, whose control will be controlled by the horizontally controlled lighting load; the target dimmer level of the respective dimmer terminal 32: attenuation time * · and shared to each Do not control the address at the same time as the dimmer terminal 32. The mode control operation of the remote monitoring system according to the third embodiment will be explained with reference to the example shown in FIG. In this example, the lighting load of the dimmer terminals 32 (1) to 32 (4) is increased by the mode switch 31c to K to its respective target dimmer level within six seconds of the decay time. The lighting load of the light dimmer terminal 32 (1) is increased to the target dimmer level 30¾; The lighting load of the light dimmer terminal 32 (2) is increased to the target dimmer level 60; ϊ; dimmer terminal 32 (3 > the lighting load of z is increased to the target dimmer level 100JK; the lighting load of Μ and the dimmer terminal 32 (4) is increased to the target dimmer level 0¾. The system shown in FIG. 7 Configuration, the individual address of the mode switch 31c is associated with the address of the simultaneous control of the dimmer terminals 32 (1) to 32 (4). When the switch Sd of the mode switch 31c is pressed, the mode switch 31c transmits an operation signal OPon To the transfer controller 30. After referring to the mode table stored in the data memory 23, the transfer controller 30 sequentially inputs the signals CHu indicating the respective preset target dimmer levels to the respective dimmer terminals 32 (1 ) To 32 (4) The transfer signal allocation by processing individual addresses as address data corresponds to the transmitted signal OPon The horizontal switch 31c controls the address at the same time as the individual address. Secondly, the transfer controller 30 sequentially transmits the 0N signal CNon for the same transfer signal for processing the individual address as the address data. CNS A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) < Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) '-Pack -------- Order --------- Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs X Consumer Cooperatives Print Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau's Consumer Cooperative 435049 ^ A7 ___B7 V. Description of the Invention (42) 0¾ Start the lighting load. The level of the target dimmer received by each of the dimmer terminals 32 (1) to 32 (4) is stored in the memory. When the dimmer terminals 32U) to 32 (4) receive the 0N signal, the dimmer terminal starts the lighting load from the dimmer level 0¾. After that, the transfer controller 30 simultaneously controls the address as an address resource by processing, and transmits the attenuation start signal CNfe including the attenuation time (six seconds) to the respective dimmer terminal 32 (1). Therefore, the respective dimmer terminals 32 (1) to 32 (4) can actually receive the attenuation start signal CNfe at the same time. When the attenuation start signal CNfe is received, the dimmer terminals 32 (1) to 32 (4) each calculate the intensity of the increase in lighting load within six seconds from the dimmer level 0¾ to the required level of each target dimmer Dimming rate and increase the intensity of the lighting load based on the calculated dimming rate (ie, fade-in operation). Simultaneously with the transmission fading start signal CHfe *, the transfer controller 30 starts counting the decay time. At the time when the transfer controller 30 has finished counting the decay time *, the OFF signal CNoff for interrupting the lighting load is transmitted to the dimmer terminal 32 (4) where the target dimmer level is set to 0¾. The dimmer terminal 32 (4) that has received the OFF signal CNoff interrupts the negative lighting cut. As described in M above *, by pressing the opening Sd of the mode switch 31c, each frame should calculate the dark rate and decay time from the target dimmer level 32 (1) to 32 (4). The self-transfer controller 30 receives the processing address data as the simultaneous control of the address decay. When the start signal CNfe is subtracted * The dimmer terminals 32 (1) to 32 (4) gradually change the intensity of the lighting load and its respective target dimming Device level. Since the intensity of the lighting load that will be controlled by the mode is changed at the same time, natural mode control can be completed. Moreover, the gradual change in light intensity can reduce the burden imposed on the eyes due to dazzling, and enable the application of the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)-45----- -[--— I! Install! — Order ------! Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) V. Description of the invention (4: ί) A7 B7 quasi-light reduction The light of the device HUM Negative light load photo Negative light change light Change gradually set the position one by one. In the light of hope change the light can be modified to be able to quickly control the swift mind, but the use of the environment-quasi-circle

予 載 負 明 照 〇 一 明 另 照 至制 載控 負 心 明精 照 境 一 環 自 據 可根 間能 時使 減 K 衰藉 的定 目設 此意 為任 οM 制 控 式 横 之 者 11 ^ 所 前 先 如 諸31 在關 関 關 之 式 模 壓 按 藉 可 明 照 前 巨 許 而 然 ο 明 照 定 設 先 預 至 換 切 以 予 跋 跋 Jam 負負 明明 照照 多多 許許 成斷 達中 為及 o ΛΗ3 frH τί 1啟 中體 及集 動供 啟制 複控 重組 Μ 行 予進 可 · 載作 負操 明種 照 此 多之 關 開 組 之 統 糸 視 監 控 遙 示 所 中 6 位32 別 子 個端 之器 Id光 yy 減 之 钱 負 明 照 多 許 之 制 控 組 到 受 圖行 , 將 是制 S 控 特與 〇 址 根 準 水 0 器32 光子 減端 標器 目光 , 減 形別 情 各 此至 在輸 使 傳 卽先 ο 預 聯 Μ 關予 址序 位程 制明 控說 時前 同先 之據 要 只 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 端則時制 器否減控 光及衰心 滅涉要精 至 不只境 輸而。環 傳,後據 址斷滯根 位 中間可 制及時便 控動之 , 時 放生位 同 時陌單 藉同為之 Μ可認組 予 也者多 fe載用許 CH負使含 明被包 號照並在 訊多,意 例 始許生任 施 開,發為。實 減32會可明四 衰子將間照第 在 樓 大 公 辦 段 區 多 許 為 分 示劃 指 Μ 所 予 (0層 具樓 器。 明.板 照花 多天 許之 t 層 示樓 所一 中在 21裝 圖安 如 K 予 如明活 諸照生 開或之® ΪΜ 用11樓t、負卜 尹丨夕Μ ^ ^Μ ^ 0 二走 許 ΐ 段 除 之 區 。 供 S.IS制 門 U控 二& Z ^ ^ 公£ m 一 ^ ^ 至 Λ 種 配間 一 分空 Μ 於之 } 應廊具 對走器 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規辂(210 Χ297公釐) 46 裝--------訂---------線 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 五、發明說明(44) 空間予K約略割分為三區域A1至A3。區域A1至A3另予Μ分 為許多區段;亦即區域U予Μ劃分為四區段Β11至Β14;區 域Α2予Μ割分為三區段Β21至Β23; Μ及區域A3予Μ豳分為 五區段Β31至Β35。 圖22示一儲存在資料記憶體23之資料表之實例〇f。組數 G1至Gn予Μ分別分配至區域A1至纟3及畐段811至B35。對應 於屬於諸組分配組数之許多照明器具之數,予Μ暫存在盒 " 目的電路。暫存在行"Object Circuit(目的電路)”之" 數字諸如” 1 ”,”2 ”,或類似數字,對應於控制端子32之位 址,供控制照明負載。名稱為” Didplay Attribute(顯示 羼性)”之行,表示指示燈操作端子31及顬示器端子所採用 之顯示方法。在本實施例,顯示方法可根據諸組予Μ選擇 性切換,並旦如此切換之顯示方法可予Κ儲存在資料記憶 體23。例如,如圖22中所示,操作狀態顧示方法予以選擇 供數組G1及(52· Μ及監視狀態顧示方法予Μ選擇供成組G3 。如此選擇之方法予Μ設定在資料表。 每—操作端子31之開關Sa至Sc與各別諸組G1至Gri關聯。 在作動開關SaS SC之一時,轉移控制器30參考暫存在資料 記憶體23之資料表。為了照明或熄滅與組數G1至Gn關聯之 照明負載,轉移控制器30傳輸控制資料至控制端子32。只 要使照明負載之狀態自控制端子32返回至轉移控制器30, 轉移控制器30便參考資料表儲存在資料記憶體23。根據對 應於諸組之顯示靥性之顯示方法,轉移控制器30發出資料 供指令照明/消光至操作端子31及顯示器端子。因此,各 — — —— —lrnl! — — — — — —II ^ ·1111 - — II (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x 297公釐) -47 - V汽五、發明說明(15) A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 方 法系儲操上 在區内糸 動用方路 定接 η 移表 示 方一 並一在 L 須之統化 Μ 啟採該電 設連tGi 轉料 顯示單,每。Μ必視系簡Μ供果-之 之 Mis訊’資 據 顯在法據法 h 供監一有Ιί?&如者制 性予 ΜΞ 時之 根態可方根方 集單具II電*明控 屬40數藉料23 燈狀,示可示一,法密在統Bll 言說以 示置組科資體 示 作例顯,顯 t 方 Μ 於糸段,而所予 顯裝^ 資定憶 指操施變此擇 1 示予由視區即照例使 及定 d 定設記 之 至莨改因選B1顯33。監及亦對施此Gη設IK設到料 子法本性。的段態具法控A3·,。 實因 至,DI之收資 端 方據擇23目區狀器方遙至路載一 ,G1是如備在在 器 示根選體用在作明示 ,ΑΙ電負第現 數別(!#準。存 示 顯,,憶使如操照顯法域二 明合實 組特料此30儲 顯定而位記之諸用明態方區要照配以 配更資如器至 及。設然單料SC, 採照狀示同需斷如予 分。定)°制存 燈態可。之資至具,滅視顯相則中諸式 如行設料控暫 示狀統法組之S3器形熄監擇果,供,肜 諸進備資移料 指之糸方多30關明情未用選如制路法之 ,40準之轉資 1^載視示許器開照此合採的.。控電方路 作置並性至定 31負監顯含制之組在配可目點及 一 示電 操裝-屬輸設 子明控態包控 一。室,用優視及顯一。定定LS示傳將 端照遙狀在移31,滅視A3使之監載態單少設設線顯Μ30 作示知視-轉子例熄監至據形以負狀 W 最種藉號定予器 操顯習監内在端實或心Α1根構予明視可數各係訊設LS制 別法 或統存作述明中域可統制照監法之 ,至及線控 ------ l· I I — I I ! I I I I I 訂,! (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 48 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 35 CM 9μ» A7 _B7_五、發明說明(4ί;) 。或則*設定操作可藉使用一具有操作端子功能之所謂選 擇器開關進行。而且 > 資料可藉個人電腦在轉移控制器30 予Μ直接檢查或設定,而不使用訊號線Ls。在任何方法下 ,可在規場完成資料之設定及檢查,並因而方法在系統構 肜上在構成後可予MS活改變。而且,顧示方法可藉使用 設定裝置40或選擇器開顒予K設定及檢査。因此,使用者 可容易設定顯示方法。配合設定受到模式及組控制操作之 操作端子31之電路*使用者也可自由分配顯示方法*因此 使能設定顧示方法。 第五實施例 根據第五實施例之遙控監視系統,在结構上實際完全相 同於根據第四實施例之遙控監視糸統,因而完全相同部份 自圖式及解釋省略。僅將解釋說明第二實施例之構形及操 作。 第五實施例K 0H-優先化控制方法及稍後操作優先化控 制方法為其特徴,均配合先前技藝所說明之此二方法,可 予Μ設定在供每一組之轉移控制器30之資料記億體23。 画23示一儲存在資料記憶體23之資料表之莨例。而且在 此實施例*組數G1至Gn予Μ分別分配至圖21中所示之區域 Α1至A3及區段Β11至Β35。設定供組數G1至G35之諸行之一 稱之為"Control Attrubyte(控制屬性)”。控制方法可在 供每一組之0N-優先化控制方法與稍後操作優先化控制方 法之間予Μ選擇性開關。例如,如圖23中所示,0N-優先 化控制方法予Μ選擇供(S1及G 2組,及稍後操作優先化控制 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 ------—訂 ---- 線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 49 4 9^ A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印制衣 五、發明說明(47) 方法予Μ選擇供組G3。如此選擇之控制方法予以設定在資 料表。 如圖24(A)中所示,組數G1及G2之區域予Μ設定供ON-優 先化控制方法,及組數G3之區域予Μ設定供稍後操作優先 化控制方法。在一與組數G1關聯之開關予Μ作動 > 同時所 有照明負載予Μ照明時(0示照明),在組G1之區域所提供 之照明負載予Μ熄滅 (X示消光)。然而,位於組G1之區域 與組G2之區域間之重叠處照明負載自中斷之物體予Κ排除 ,並保持照明。雖然在組G1之區域所提供之所有照明負載 包括在組G3之區域,但組G3予Μ設定至稍後-操作-優宪化 控制方法。因而,在組G1之區域所提供之照明負載,可藉 作動一與設定至0Η-優先化控制方法之組G1關聯之開關予 以熄滅。而且,如圖 24(B)中所示,作動一與組G3關聯之 開關,同時所有照明負載被照明,並且靨於組數G1及G2之 照明負載被熄滅*而不論照明負載之狀態*因為組G3予Μ 設定至稍後操作優先化控制方法。 在習知遙控監視系統,控制方法可予Μ設定至0Ν-優先 化控制方法或稍後操作優先化控制方法《然而*根據本實 施例,控制方法可在單一糸統内,在包含許多組之單位, 選擇性改變顯示方法*並儲存在轉移控制器1之賁料記憶 體5。因此,可根據每一操作端子31之開關Sa至Sc之使用 目的選擇顯示方法。在上述實例,一組照明器具,諸如在 區段B11者,予Μ局部照明或熄滅。在此情形,採用ON-優 先化方法。供必須在中心監視室*就未熄滅照明照明器具 本€張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) ~ 50 - I I I I I l· l· I Ϊ t, - I I I I I----------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} A7 B7 五、發明說明(,is) 31予Μ密集監視之區域A1至A3*可採用。稍後操作優先化 控制方法。由於在單一条統内可根據使用目的選擇顯示方 法,遙控監視系統具有簡化糸統構肜之優點。 在第二實施例*僅與設定至ON-優先化控制方法之許多 開關其關聯之照明負載(在Μ上實例•暫存在組數G1之區 域與組數G2之區域間之重叠處照明負載,自S —開關之中 斷動作排除。因此· ON-優先化功能僅在二狙(G1及G2)間 之重曼處變為有效。屬於未設定至ON-儍先化控制方法之 另一組(G3)之照明負載,不自另一開翮之中斷動作排除。 因之,印使希望受到0 fl -優先化控制之個別照明負載屬於 另一稍後操作優先化控制組。也無問題發生,因此,在每 一組不需要提供諸如配合先前技藝所說明者之虛擬控制端 子。 數 組I am carrying a bright photo, one is another photo, and the other is the control, and the mind is the essence of the picture. As the basis of the data, we can reduce the K and reduce the borrowing time when the energy is available. This is meant to be any person.M Controlled type of person 11 ^ Previous As in the 31, the embossing press in the Guanguanguan style can be bright before the bright picture. The bright picture is set to advance to the cut to give postage to Jam. The negative and bright picture is more and more Xu Xu can be broken in the middle of the day. O ΛΗ3 frH τί 1 Kaizhong and the collection for Kaizhi re-control and reorganization M can be carried forward · Contained as the control instructions, the control system of the many open and closed groups, contempt monitoring and remote monitoring station 6 32 Id The light yy minus the money and the bright photo control system to the receiving bank will be the control system and the 0-position quasi-level 0 device 32 photon minus end sight device, the minus shape is in the loser Preliminaries ο pre-linkage 关 Guan Yu site sequence system clear control said the same time as the previous evidence (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumer cooperatives printed end-of-day system Whether the device can reduce the control of light and heart failure, the involvement must be refined to more than just lose. According to the ring pass, the middle position of the stagnation root can be controlled in a timely manner, and the release position can be used at the same time, and the MO can borrow the same identifiable group to the person. And in Xunduo, the beginning of the example of Xu Sheng Ren Shi Kai, issued. The actual reduction of 32 will show that the four deceased sons will be able to indicate the number of points designated by the office in the public office section of the building (0 storeys. Ming. Banzhao spent many days on the t storehouse.) In the first installment of the 21st figure, An Ru K, Yu Ru Ming, Zhao Zhao Sheng Kai or Zhi ®Μ, use the 11th floor t, negative Yin Yin xi ^ ^ Μ ^ 0 to take the area divided by Xu 。. For S.IS Door control U & Z & Z ^ ^ public £ m one ^ ^ to Λ species match one minute M in it} application corridor tool to walker This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 regulations (210 χ297 (Mm) 46 Pack -------- Order --------- line A7 B7 Consumption Cooperation of Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs DU 5. Description of Invention (44) Space is roughly divided for K There are three areas A1 to A3. Areas A1 to A3 are further divided into many sections; that is, area U to M is divided into four sections B11 to B14; area A2 to M is divided into three sections B21 to B23; Μ And area A3 to M 豳 are divided into five sections B31 to B35. Fig. 22 shows an example of a data table stored in data memory 23. Groups G1 to Gn to M are allocated to areas A1 to 纟 3 and 畐, respectively. Segments 811 to B35. Corresponds to The number of many lighting fixtures allocated to each group is stored temporarily in the box " target circuit. The number " in the "object circuit" is temporarily stored, such as "1", "2", or the like The number corresponds to the address of the control terminal 32 for controlling the lighting load. The line named "Didplay Attribute" indicates the display method used by the indicator operation terminal 31 and the indicator terminal. In this implementation For example, the display method can be selectively switched according to the groups M, and the display method thus switched can be stored in the data memory 23. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, the operation state inspection method is selected for the array G1 And (52 · M and the monitoring status indication method, M is selected for group G3. The method thus selected is set in the data table. Each of the switches Sa to Sc of the operation terminal 31 is associated with the respective groups G1 to Gri. When one of the switches SaS SC is activated, the transfer controller 30 refers to the data table temporarily stored in the data memory 23. In order to illuminate or extinguish the lighting load associated with the groups G1 to Gn, the transfer controller 30 transmits control data to Control terminal 32. As long as the state of the lighting load is returned from the control terminal 32 to the transfer controller 30, the transfer controller 30 refers to the data table and stores it in the data memory 23. According to the display method corresponding to the display characteristics of the groups, the transfer The controller 30 sends information for instructing lighting / diming to the operation terminal 31 and the display terminal. Therefore, each — — — — — lrnl! — — — — — — II ^ · 1111-— II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x 297 mm) -47-V. V. Description of the invention (15) A7 B7 The printing method of the employee consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is to store and use the road in the district to set up η and move the parties together. L shall be unified M. The electrical equipment shall be connected to the tGi rebate display sheet, each. M 必 视 是 JianM 果 果-的 的 Mi 斯 讯 's data is evident in the law and law. For the supervisor, there is Ιί? &Amp; If the system is restricted to ΜΞ, the root state can be set up with II electricity * Ming control belongs to 40 numbers and borrows 23 lights, which can be shown as one. The method of confession in the system Bll is shown as an example of the display of the group's resources. It is shown that the square M is in the 糸 section, and it is displayed ^ Zi Dingyi Refers to the practice of changing this option 1 to show that the viewing area, as usual, and the setting of d and d set the record to change due to the choice of B1 display 33. The monitoring also applies this Gη to IK to the nature of the material law. The segmentation is controlled by law A3 ·. The reason is that the receiving end of DI has selected 23 meshes as far away as Lu Zaiyi. G1 is used as a display device in the display device, and is used for explicit display. Precisely, save the display, and remember that if you operate the display area, the Erming and Shishi group will specialize in the 30 storage display and the use of the clear state square area to be equipped with more resources such as equipment. SC, according to the state of illumination, the same need to be broken if it is divided. It is possible to store the state of the lamp. In the case of a complete set of materials, the S3 device in the form of the material control and temporary display system of the visual control system in the form of dismissing the visual manifestation, selects the results, provides, and provides more than 30 levels of information. Unused, such as the road control method, 40 quasi-funded capital 1 ^ contains the visual indicator to open the license. The electricity-controlling party's integration is determined to be 31. The group with negative supervision and display system is equipped with a visual point and an indicator operation device-it is an output device. Room, with UTV and Xianyi. Set the LS display to move the end-photo remotely at 31, dismiss the A3 to make the monitoring state, and set the line display M30 as the display. The rotor example is turned off until the data is negative. The internal control of the device is shown by the internal truthfulness or the heart of A1. It is clear that countless departments can set up the LS system or store it as a statement that the central region can control the law of supervision and control, and wire control ---- -l · II — II! IIIII Order! (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 48 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 35 CM 9μ »A7 _B7 _V. Description of the invention (4ί;). Or the * setting operation can be performed by using a so-called selector switch having an operation terminal function. Moreover, the data can be directly checked or set by the personal computer at the transfer controller 30 to M without using the signal line Ls. In any method, the setting and inspection of the data can be completed in the field, and thus the method can be modified by the MS after the system is constructed. Moreover, the Gu Shi method can be set and checked for K by using the setting device 40 or the selector. Therefore, the user can easily set the display method. The circuit of the operation terminal 31 which is subject to the mode and group control operation according to the setting * The user can also freely assign the display method * Therefore, the setting of the display method can be enabled. Fifth Embodiment The remote monitoring system according to the fifth embodiment is actually completely identical in structure to the remote monitoring system according to the fourth embodiment, and therefore the same parts are omitted from the drawings and explanations. Only the configuration and operation of the second embodiment will be explained. The fifth embodiment K 0H- the prioritization control method and the later operation prioritization control method are special features, both of which are compatible with the two methods described in the previous art, and can be set to the data of the transfer controller 30 for each group. Remember billion body 23. Figure 23 shows an example of a data table stored in the data memory 23. And in this embodiment * the group numbers G1 to Gn to M are allocated to the areas A1 to A3 and the sections B11 to B35 shown in Fig. 21, respectively. One of the ways to set the number of groups G1 to G35 is called "Control Attrubyte". The control method can be between the 0N-priority control method for each group and the operation priority control method later For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the ON-priority control method is provided for M selection (S1 and G 2 groups, and the operation priority control will be performed later. Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) Binding -------- Ordering ---- The size of the paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 49 4 9 ^ A7 B7 Employees ’cooperation in intellectual property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du printed clothing V. Description of the invention (47) Method M is selected for group G3. The control method thus selected is set in the data table. As shown in FIG. 24 (A), the area of the group number G1 and G2 is set for M For ON-priority control method, and the area of group number G3 is set for M to be operated later. Priority control method is used. When a switch associated with group number G1 is actuated at the same time, when all lighting loads are illuminated by M (0 Display lighting), the lighting load provided in the area of group G1 is extinguished by M (X indicates extinction However, the lighting load located at the overlap between the area of group G1 and the area of group G2 is excluded from the interrupted objects and the lighting is maintained. Although all lighting loads provided in the area of group G1 are included in the area of group G3, However, the group G3 is set to the later-operation-constitutionalized control method. Therefore, the lighting load provided in the area of the group G1 can be actuated by a switch associated with the group G1 set to 0 至 -priority control method. Also, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), a switch associated with group G3 is activated, and all lighting loads are illuminated, and the lighting loads dwelling on groups G1 and G2 are extinguished * regardless of the lighting load. Status * Because group G3 and M are set to a later operation prioritized control method. In the conventional remote monitoring system, the control method can be set to ON-priority control method or later operation prioritized control method "However * according to this In the embodiment, the control method can selectively change the display method * in a single system, including units of many groups, and store it in the data memory 5 of the transfer controller 1. Therefore, according to each operating terminal, The display purpose of the switches Sa to Sc of 31 is to select the display method. In the above example, a group of lighting appliances, such as those in section B11, are partially illuminated or turned off. In this case, the ON-priority method is used. Central monitoring room * For unlit lighting fixtures, this standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) ~ 50-IIIII l · l · I Ϊ t,-IIII I ----- ------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page} A7 B7 V. Invention Description (, is) 31 Areas A1 to A3 * that can be closely monitored by M can be used. The control method is prioritized later. Since the display method can be selected according to the purpose of use in a single system, the remote monitoring system has the advantage of simplifying the system configuration. In the second embodiment * only the lighting load associated with many switches set to the ON-priority control method (example on M • temporarily overlaps the area between the group number G1 area and the group number G2 area with the lighting load, Since S-switch interruption action is eliminated. Therefore, ON-priority function becomes effective only in the heavy man between the two (G1 and G2). It belongs to another group that is not set to ON-stupid priorization control method The lighting load of G3) is not excluded from the interruption action of another switch. Therefore, the individual lighting load that wants to be controlled by 0 fl-priority control belongs to another priority control group for later operation. No problem occurs, Therefore, it is not necessary to provide virtual control terminals such as those described in the previous art in each group.

設 之 性靥 示 顯 如 諸 作 操 定 設 種 各 及 配 分 之 Π G 使 且 藉而 可 作行 操進 定所 設關 , 開 貝 索 或擇 ο 選 行諝 進所 所之 40能 置功 裝之 定子 設端 用作 使操 藉有 係具 » 一 定用 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--- 訂---------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 定料 設資 或成 査完 檢場 接現 直在 Μ 可 予 , 30下 器法 制 方 控何 移任 轉在 在 。 腦LS 電線 人號 個訊 藉用 可使 料不 資而 靈擇方 後選示 成或顯 構40定 在置設 上裝易 形定容 構設可 統用者 糸 使用 在藉使 法可 , 方法此 使方因 可示。 而顯査 因,檢 並且及 , 而定 査 ® 設 檢變 Κ 及改予 定應關 設適開 之活器 使定 , 設 路用 電 使 之際 3 實 子據 端根 作能 操使 之此 制因 控 , 組法 及方 式示 模顯 到 配 受分 定由 設自 。 合可法 配也方 ο 者示 法用顯 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x297公釐) -51 - 435049 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 _B7_五、發明說明(43) 根據第五實施例之控制鼷性之選擇及設定,可配合配合 第四實施例所說明顯示方法之選擇及設定予以實施。例如 ,局部操作數組(G1及G2)予以分配稍後操作優先化控制方 法及操作狀態顯示方法。置於局部諸組間之重叠處之負載 ,予Μ分配ON -優先化控制方法及操作狀態顯示方法。包 括操作狀態由中心予Μ監視之負載之一組(G3),予Μ分配 稍後操作優先化控制方法及監視狀態顯示方法。因此,可 大為改進遙控監視糸統之方便性。 第六實施例 在本案實施例*許多同時控制位址予Κ分配至一減光器 端子32。在習知之遙控監視系統* 一位址予Μ儲存作為包 含若干字之資料。因之*造成一分配許多位址之端子,需 要容量至少為位址數之整倍數之記憶體,其復使得端子大 並增加成本。而且*位址之設定耗用很多時間。例如,設 若設定一捗及8位元資料之位址,如果物理位址為00Η至 FFH,設定256位址,便涉及2048位元資科。而且,在許多 位址(Η位址)予以分配至一端子*並且位址分別與電路(1) 至(fO關聯之情形*將需要如圖6中所示之下列控制。特別 是,在收到轉移訊號時*端子確定在轉移訊號所包括之位 址資料是否匹配電路(1)之位址。僅在位址之間存在匹配 時,方始進行將行在位址匹配之時間予K執行之處理。如 果在位址之間無匹配存在,則確定如位址資料及電路(2) 之位址是否匹配。僅在匹配存在時,方始進行將行在位址 匹配之時間予Μ執行之處理。如果無匹配存在*確定在位 氏張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) —52 - (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)The nature of the design is manifested as the various operations of the design and the allocation of the Π G, so that you can perform the operation and set the setting, open the beso or choose ο select the line of the 40 can be installed The stator set end is used to make the operating gear available »Be sure to use it (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). Install --- Order --------- Staff of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperate with Du Yin to set up materials or set up the inspection site and receive the cash at the inspection site, which can be handled by the government. The brain LS wire person number can be borrowed to make the choice or display of the choice after the choice of the material is 40. The installation can be easily installed on the installation. The structure can be used by the user. This makes the cause possible. The obvious investigation is due to the inspection, and the inspection, and the establishment of the inspection and change the K and change should be set to open a living device to make sure, set the road to use electricity when the 3 real child can do this Control by factors, group methods and methods show that the distribution is determined by the set. The law of the law can be used to display the paper size of the display. Applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210x297 mm) -51-435049 A7. Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Consumption Du Print_B7_ 五 、 Description of the Invention (43) The selection and setting of control properties according to the fifth embodiment can be implemented in cooperation with the selection and setting of the display method described in the fourth embodiment. For example, the local operation arrays (G1 and G2) are assigned to later operation priority control methods and operation status display methods. The load placed at the overlap between the local groups is assigned ON-the priority control method and the operation status display method. Including a group of loads (G3) whose operation status is monitored by the center, and assigned to the operation priority control method and monitoring status display method. Therefore, the convenience of the remote monitoring system can be greatly improved. Sixth Embodiment In the present embodiment, * many simultaneous control addresses are assigned to K to a dimmer terminal 32. In the conventional remote monitoring system *, one address is stored in M as a number of words of information. Because of this, a terminal that allocates many addresses requires memory with a capacity that is at least an integral multiple of the number of addresses, which makes the terminals large and increases costs. And * address setting takes a lot of time. For example, if you set the address of a frame and 8-bit data, if the physical address is from 00 ° to FFH, and set a 256 address, it will involve 2048-bit assets. Moreover, in the case where many addresses (Η addresses) are assigned to one terminal * and the addresses are respectively associated with the circuits (1) to (fO *), the following control as shown in FIG. 6 will be required. In particular, When the transfer signal arrives, the * terminal determines whether the address data included in the transfer signal matches the address of the circuit (1). Only when there is a match between the addresses, can the K line be executed at the time when the address matches. Processing. If there is no match between the addresses, determine if the address data and the address of the circuit (2) match. Only when the match exists, the processing of the line at the time of address matching will be performed by M. .If no match exists * Make sure that the in-situ scale is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) —52-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

-I -- I. .^1 I 訂---------線 4 35 Ο 4 Α7 _Β7_ 五、發明說明(50) 址賣科與電路(N)之位址之間是否存匹配。僅在匹配存在 時,方始進行將行在位址匹配之時間予Μ執行之處理。作 成最多之Ν確定。由於一確定位址匹配耗用很多時間,故 必須減低轉移速率或必須減少電路之數。 要解決此類型之問題,減光器端子32設有位址設定記憶 體Μ,其中如圖4中所示*每一位元之位置與一單一位址關 聯。一位址旗標予Μ設定在位址設定記憶體Μ之任何位元 位置|並且對應於位元位置之位址予以取為減光器端子32 之位址。圖4示32x8位元圖記憶體。在第一列之各別位元 * Κ自左順序與00H-1FH關聯;.在第二列之各別位元,以 自左順序與20H-3FH關聯;在第三列之各別位元,Μ自左 順序與40 H-5FH關聯;在第四列之各別位元· Μ自左順序 與60H-7F Η關聯;在第五列之各別位元,以自左順序與 80關聯;在第六列之各別位元,Μ自左丨犋序與 A0H-BFH關聯;在第t列之各別位元,Μ自左順序與 COH-D FT關聯;Μ及在第八列之各別位元,Μ自左顒序與 E0H-FFH關聯在圖4中所示之實例,依據每一位元為0或為1 確定有或無位址旗標。位址旗搮予以設定在03Η及04Η(位 元資料在對應於03Η及04Η之位元位置取1之值)。更特別是 ,256位址可通過使用256位元資料予Κ設定。根據本發明 之系統所需要之資料量,可減少至習知糸統所需要資料量 之八分之一;亦即,資料量可自204S位元減少至256位元 。因之,可減低記憶體容量,其復導致成本減低。而且, 可減少設定一位址所需要之資料量,並因而可縮短供設定 t紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ------— I 訂--I------ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -53 - 五、發明說明(5f) A7 B7 確址 了 位 為自 0 供 定 , 設置 Μ 裝 予有 式設 格10 圖段 元區 位理 種處 1 子 Κ 端 〇 址 , 間位在 時,配 之述匹 用所間 耗上之 所Μ址 址如位 位定 移位 轉 於 之應 收對 接圖 在元 於位 應在 對置 置位 位元 元位 位在 一 ο ( ) 址料 位資 圖 址 元位 位之 i 括 算包 計所 料號 資訊 時 )^一曰 時而 標照 旗對 址。 位理 一 處 定之 設行 在執 ,K 即予 亦間 時 之 為配 料匹 資址 址位 在 行 將 行 進 位 元 位 果 如 , 數 ο 之 為址 置位 定 設 先 預 論 不 ο 號 訊 移 轉1 次 收 接 供 作 操 行 進 可 使 可 ο 配 匹 間 之 址 位 定 確 成 完 作 操1 單 過 通 可 。 速 置移 装轉 速加 低 0 貴 貴 昂 昂 不不 之可 ο έ 1 並 段 -區制 理限 處所 子率 端逮 供移 址轉 位受 多路 許電 有干 具若 一 止 。 用防率 例 施 實 ir 第 六 第 據 根 與 上 形 構 在 統 糸 視 監 控 遙 之 例 施 實 七 第 據 根 間 之 統 糸 視 監 控 遙31 二 關 釋開 解制 將控 僅組 ο 1 同 , 相例 全施 完實 上 三 本第 基據 者根 例 〇 施異 實差 子 端 作 操 與 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I ' II--1 訂---------線 至 聯 關 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 子 端 作 操 至 至 配 分 Μ 予 址31 位關 制開 控制 時控 同組 同壓 相按 且 。 並4) d S 之 關 開 制 控 組 自 控1 輸 傳 S L 線 號 訊 過 0Ρ通 號30 訊器 F *=1 作 帝 操控 之移 關轉)' 開。號 動 3 訊 作器移 止制轉 姐控1( 供移CN 1 轉號 * 至 訊 時輸制 子 端 作 操 括 包 -r*t\ 至 聯控 關收 se接 關時 開同 動際 作實 與4) 止 a 阻31 供 至 含 η 包 日 έ 1 0 3 , 子 址端 位 作 制操 控。 時料 。 同資 1 之之^ 用斷號 共中訊 所之制 開 下 壓 使 即 後 隨 控 受 不 也 0 負 明 照 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 54 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7_五、發明說明(52) 制。 隨後,再次按壓組控制開關31b之開關Sd *致使一表示 開關之作動為有效之操作訊號0P2自組控制開關31b傳輸至 轉移控制器30。轉移控制器30發出一控制訊號CN2 (轉移訊 號)至訊號線Ls*其包括操作端子31a(l)至31a(4)所共用 之同時控制位址,並且其使一與開關Se之作動關聯之中斷 有效。操作端子31a(l)至31a(4)實際同時接收控制訊號 CN2,並且其後可藉開關Se之作動控制照明負載。特別是 ,根據第Η實施例之組控制開關31b備供鎖定(阻止)其他 操作端子31a(l)至31a(4)之作動。僅按壓姐控制開關31b 之開關Sc!,藉Μ胆止操作端子31aU)至31a(4)控制照明負 載。 第八實施例 根據第八實施例之遙控監視系統,在结構上實際完全相 同於根據第六實施例者。僅將解釋二遙控監視糸統之間差 異。在第四實施例,一通風扇L予Μ連接作為至控制端子 32之負載。 在第四實施例,一共用同時控制位址gU分配至圖11中 所示之操作端子31a(l)至31a(4)。如圖12中所示,一轉移 控制器3 0使用一包括同時位址作為同步訊號供配合操作端 子31a(l)至31a(4)之操作顧示燈使用之控制訊號CN。根據 第四實施例*操作顯示燈可在相同循環閃爍,並因而可檢 査(感知)負載L之操作(啟動)狀態。 第九實施例 -S5'- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------- L--- - -- ------I I ^ -----I--- <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 435049^ Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(ϋ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖31示一根據本發明第九箕施例之遙控監視系統,其構 形之實例。在整個說明書中,”上” ”下”,”右”,”左",•’ 前”,”後”等用語,在本文用以在其定向在其預計予Μ使 用之方向時,指定本發明之構成元件。例示之遙控監視系 統主要在構肜上不同於在第一至第八實施例所說明之遙控 監視系統其中該系統包含設定操作端子12及12。然而,其 中操作端子之位址及控制端子之位址予Μ配置為致使彼此 對應,Κ及一界定對應之對應表予以暫存在一轉移控制器 30,糸統為完全相同。表示位址之間對應之對應表,通過 使用設定操作端子1,予Κ設定在轉移控制器30。如果彼 此對應之操作端子之位址及控制端子之位址,予Κ設定至 完全相同值,便可容易瞭解位址間之對應。在此意義上* 使用Μ通道”之概念> Μ指定一位址。彼此對應成一種一對 一關係操 作端子之位址及之位址控制端子*予以設定至 相同通道。在一通道(位址),指定一負載數*可藉以控制. 四負載L。例如,” 0 ”通道使能控制四負載L分配之負載數 ”厂至”4”。通道”(Τ之負載L分配之負載數”1Β,偽由”0-1” 表示。因此,均為如此設定之通道及負載數, 予以成一 對使用,從而操作端子及控制端子可予Μ配置為致使彼此 對應。 在本發明*遙控監視糸統包含白熾燈L,;螢光燈各 有一反相器照明裝置;一空氣調節器之風扇線圈U;以及 一揚聲器k。白熾燈L1藉減光器控制端子331至333 (1500W,800W*及5001Π予Μ控制*其容量對應於燈之數 --IJI 卜^----- I < J I ! I I — 訂·-------- (請先間讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 56 4350 49 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 B7_五、發明說明(Γ)4) 。螢光燈Li藉有中繼供控制照明及消光之一控制端子32 > 及藉一供控制光輸出之減光器控制端子33,予Μ控制。減 先器控制端子33*傳送0伏至10伏電壓訊號至照明裝置*並 且照明装置藉電壓訊號改變自螢光燈L·所發出之光之強度 。一供配合嵐扇線圏使用之控制端子33,Μ三階段控制風 扇線圈U之操作速率。揚聲器L之音量藉一供音量控制目 的之控制端子3 3 7予Μ控制。其他電動器具,諸如電動窗 帘*電動屏幕,及通風扇,可予Μ連接作為至遙控監視系 統之其他負載。 遙控監視糸統包含作為操作端子*有一開關So在構肜上 完全相同於第一至第八實施例中之開關之控制端子31;減 光器操作端子38,及3 ;以及一操作端子(一種類型之監 視端子,供允許連接各種感测器,以供產生觸點輸出 之觸點輸入使用。甚至對操作區段提供一無線發射機3 4a *並配合一無線接收機34b使用無線發射機34a *也珂藉Μ 構成一操作端子。二減光器操作端子38!及3S,,就操作區 段之R寸及結構而言*為基本上彼此不同。減光器操作端 子3 包含一較小按鈕把手 > 並且減光器操作端子38ι包含 一較大鋼琴把手型把手,其一側予以樞接式支承。減光器 操作端子3心及3L在基本操作上為完全相同。如圖中所 示,為了延伸訊號線Ls,一中繼器(放大器)35予Μ連接至 訊號線Ls,藉Μ使能傳輸轉移訊號,而不涉及衰減。在例 示之實例,二設定操作端子1,及^予Μ連接至中繼器35。 設定操作端子1,提供彩色顧示,及設定操作端子U提供單 --1--I ---- I---- J -----I--訂·--------線 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用十國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 57 & ----— - 1 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(55) 色顯示。彩色顯示設定操作端子予以自一遙控變壓器( 稍後將予Μ說明)36供給2 4伏交流電源。彩色顯示及單色 顯示’就實際功能而言幾乎相同,因而操作端子^及丨上均 稱作”設定操作端子1 ” *而在其之間不劃界線。 規將說明供設定對應資料之程序。設定程序可劃分為三 階段:一預處理階段,在此階段*開始對應資料之傳輪; 一傳輸處理階段,在此階段,實際傳輸對應資料;Κ及一 後處理階段*在此階段《完成對應資料之傳輸。在開始操 作時,轉移控制器30設定其傳輸狀態至”Ν0 TRANSHISSI0N(不傳輸)”,表示不傳輸對應資料。換言之 *轉移控制器30進入與負載L予以控制之習知轉移控制器 者相同之操作模式。除非產生中斷訊號*確定是否實施資 料傳輸。如果不實胞資料傳輸•轉移控制器30進行重複產 生虛擬横式之轉移訊號之全時輪詢操作。 在預處理階段*如果試圖傳輸對懕資料至轉移控制器30 ,端子產生一中斷訊號。因而*中斷訊號予K檢測。在檢 測中斷訊號時,轉移控制器30規定巳發出中斷訊號並確定 中斷要求之端子。此處理係與在控制負載L時所進行者相 同。在傳輸對應資料時,設定操作端子1發出一資料轉移 要求至轉移控制器30。為了表示正行傳輸對應資料*轉移 控制器30之傳輸狀態予Μ設定至” TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS(傳輸進行中)”。如果無資料轉移要求自設定揲 作端子1發出,這指示負載L之普通控制,並且因而轉移控 制器30根據要求控制負載L。 f紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 一 5 8 — 五、發明說明( A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 訊號在轉移控制器30與設定操作端子1之間,Μ下列方 式予Μ交換。更特別是*設定操作端子1發出一中斷訊號 。響應此中斷訊號*轉移控制器30設定一中斷旗標*俾進 行中斷輪詢操作,並等待設定操作端子I之位址返回。在 收到設定操作端子1之位址時,轉移控制器30監視一來自 設定操作端子1之要求。響應監視轉移控制器30之要求, 設定操作端子1要求轉移控制器30接收對應資料。在收到 要求時,轉移控制器30清除中斷旗標。而且,為了使能交 換對應資科,轉移控制器30保證位址部位之256位元組供 儲存對應資料。256位元組予Μ取為一單元,並稱為一頁 ;因此,保證位址部位之一頁。在以此方式保證位址部位 之一頁時,保證供暫存對應資料之位址部位被報告至設定 操作端子1,並且要求設定操作端子1開始傳輸對應資料。 在已要求設定操作端子1供傳輸對應資料後,轉移控制器 30監視自設定操作端子1傳輸對應資料之狀態。在可能傳 輸對應資料之通知(亦即” TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS” 之通知)自設定操作端子1返回時,轉移控制器30進人傳輸 處理階段。 在傳輸處理階段,設定操作端子1傳輸對應資料至轉移 控制器30。如果對應資料在通過一次傳輸予以發出之量太 大*僅傳輸對應資料之一部份。如果對應資料之轉移尚未 完成,設定操作端子1再次發出一中斷訊號,俾重複上述 處理操作,藉Μ繼續傳輸對應資料。 更特別是*轉移控制器30監視自設定操作端子1所傳輸 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ill — —--訂--------- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 59 435049«! A7 _B7_五、發明說明(57) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 對應資料之量*並導致設定操作端子1返回一位元組計數 器訊號。隨後,轉移控制器30監視對應資科,並導致設定 操作端子1在位元組計數器訊號所規定之若干位元組傳輸 對應資料。此處,並非在一次傳輸所有對應資料,而是對 應資料予Μ劃分為許多資料分段。自設定操作端子1至轉 移控制器3之傳輸對應資料予Μ重複,直到在位元組計數 器訊號所規定之若干位元組完成傅輪對應資料。最後,轉 移控制器30要求設定操作端子1發出一關於對應資枓之檢 查和。在收到檢査和時,轉移控制器30確定是否曾發生傳 輸誤差。對應資料包含供辨別將行受到模式控制模式所使 用之模式數,或供辨別將行受到組控制之諸組所使用之組 數;將行予Μ控制之負載L之位址;Μ及控制之性質。根 據在予Μ劃分時,自設定操作端子1傳輸至轉移控制器30 之對應資料之内容 > 關於模式控制或組控制之對應表予Κ 暫存在轉移控制器30。 後處理操作為一供設定轉移控制器30之傳輸狀態至"Η0 TRANSMISSION”之操作。在完成對應資料之設定後*轉移 控制器30監視設定操作端子1之轉移狀態,並確定完成賣 料傳輸。隨後,發出一資料傳輸完成指令,藉Μ告知設定 搡作端子1完成關於傳輸對應資料之所有處理操作。 在此等程序下,在負載L可予Κ控制,並且尚未產生供 負載L之控制資料時之閑置時間,供模式或組控制目的之 對應資料可予Μ自設定操作端子1傳輸至轉移控制器30。 如Μ上所述,在該實施例*對應資料在予Κ分開為分段 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 60 4 35049、* A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 B7_五、發明說明(58) 時,在不同時間自設定操作端子1予以傳輸至轉移控制器 30。其原因為在一次傳輸相同量之對應賢科,需要較長傳 輪時間,從而升高發生負載L無法予以控制之時間期間之 可能性。只要對應賣料予W傳輸同時利用不使用供控制負 載L之閑置時間其餘在一割分狀態,便可傳輪對應資料, 而不導入負載L無法予Μ控制之時間期間。為了在其為在 制分吠態時,傳輸對應資料,轉移控制器30保留關於傳輸 狀態之資料。藉表示” TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS”之資料 ,及表示”NO TRANSMISSION”之資料,轉移控制器30可確 定未傳輸之對應資料分段是否仍然保持。因此,如果在傳 輸狀態為” TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS”時之期間,要求轉 移控制器30控制負載L,轉移控制器30便控制負載L,優先 於傳輪對應資料。在完成負載L之控制後,傳輸對懕資料 恢復,藉Μ使能傳輸對應資料,而不妨礙負載L之控制p 其次,將說明設定操作端子1之構形。如圖30中所示’ 設定操作端子1包含一自一液晶顯示器及一背光附著至液 晶顯示器形成為一單件之液晶區段Π:K及一重叠在菝晶 區段11之螢幕之透明觸控板12。使用包含一矩陣像素之 液晶顯示器,供液晶區段Π,其中圖形藉像素之組合予以 顯示。觸控板12包含一透明片構件*及自透明電極所形成 並配置在片構件之許多觸點a觸控板12為一種電阻壓敏型 。並輸出一手指或類似構件觸控Η構件之位置。 設定操作端子1包含一傳輸/接收電路21’,其予Μ連接 至連接至轉移控剌器30之訊號線Ls*並且其交換轉移訊號 (請先閱讀背面之注項再填寫本頁> 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 61 4 350 4 9' A7 B7 五、發明說明(59) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 。傳輸/接收電路21 ’予以連接至一在傳輸處理區段與控制 區段之間共用之主微電腦20'。主徽電腦20’根據程式及資 料操作,其均予Μ寫人在快閃記憶體22。供確定位址之功 能資料及端子之功能予以寫入至至少袂閃記憶體22之一部 份。而且,供遙控監視系統現有之資料,諸如各種訊息及 符號,也予Μ儲存在快閃記憶體22。 主微電腦2 0 '藉由一問鎖電路2 3 ’轉移資料至一液晶控制 器24’*供指令在液晶區段11之顯示内容。通過使用預先 暫存在DRAM25資料|液晶控制器24'指示在菝晶區段11之 預定位置之預定資訊。如稍後將予以說明,DRAM25之内容 可由使用者予Μ設定。特別是*使用者可通過使用觸控板 12,設定主微電腦20’至設定模式*藉以設定内容*並且 如此設定之内容予Μ儲存在DRA M2 5。主微電腦20'予以設 定至操作横式,並操作觸控板12*從而通過使用儲存在 DRAM25之資科,設定將行顯示在疲晶區段之資訊。液晶 區段11之對比及背光之亮度,藉由主微電腦20’*藉控制 對比調整區段26及背光反相器電路27予Μ調整,。而且, 一嘟嘟發聲器28予Μ連接至主微電腦20’。萬一使用者觸 摸觸控板12之預定部位,或進行不合格操作,便啟動嘟嘟 發聲器28,藉Μ告知使用者接受輸入或一不合格操作。宜 設定不同之聲音,分別供不合格操作及接受輸人。 設定操作端子11包含一背光,並因而需要較高功率。為 此原因|設定操作端子1之之内部功率不自訊號線Ls供給 ,並且設定操作端子1予Μ供給一電源電路29予Μ整流及 -Λ 0 _ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 62 ------r k---Γ ---- -----I--^ ---I----- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 435049 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明( GO) 穩定之交流24伏。供給至電源電路29之交流24伏自一連同 轉移控制器30配置在一配電板之遙控變壓器予Μ供給。此 遙控變壓器為習知備供舖給功率至一可不藉一轉移訊號, 但藉另一開關啟動或中斷之遙控中繼。自遙控變壓器輸出 之交流24伏予Μ供給至設定操作端子1,因此免除需要直 接自商用電源諸如交流180伏供給功率至設定操作端子1。 由於使用作為內部功率之5伏,12伏*及20伏電壓低於24 伏,通遇使用一種簡單構形,諸如所需要數之電壓穩定電 路,可獲得希望之電壓。 上述設定搡作端子1具有圖32中所示之構彤。特別是, 設定操作端子1係藉一有液晶區段11及觸控板12之操作顯 示器單元2,及一供容納其他電路之主單元3*可能移除式 連接在一起所構成。 操作顯示器單元2包含一前主體41,其前表面(亦即圖3 中所示之上表面)予Μ開啟;予Μ設定在凸台4U,在主體 41之内底面提供在直立位置之板形液晶區段Π; Μ及置於 疲晶區段11之之前惻表面之片狀觸控板12。一矩形框架形 中間板42予以重叠在觸控板12之前側面。液晶區段11之一 顧示器部位藉由一形成在中間板42之窗口 42 a而變為露出 。而且,一矩形裝飾板43予Μ置於中間板42之前表面。前 主體41,中間板42,及裝飾板43係自絕緣合成樹脂所形成 。而且,觸控板12荏藉手指或其他構件壓下時被啟動。一 可更換透明保護片13予Μ標記至觸控板12之表面,因此防 止指紋留在觸控板12。如果保護片13被指紋或塵土染汙, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 63 ---------- ---yr 裝------ - 訂 ----I---線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) / Q v..五、發明說明(G2) A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員Η消費合作社印製 由在液晶區段11及觸控板12所指示圖肜及字元之組合所形成 如果關於將行予以之所有負載之控制顯示及操作區段之 資料予Μ顯示在液晶區段11之單一螢幕*需要液晶區段11 有一大螢幕,因此使設定操作端子1昂貴及笨重。為防止 此問題,使液晶區段1之每螢幕予以顯示之資料量較低, 並且關於許多負載之顯示及操作區段之資料可藉切換螢幕 顧不器予以指ττϊ在彼晶顯τκ區段11°特別是,觸控板12之 操作性質之解釋*與出現在液晶區段11之螢幕顯示關聯予 Μ改變。 如圖33中所示*在液晶11之螢幕,在左行指示供切換螢 幕之五按鈕S1至S5。此等按鈕$1至35始終予Μ指示,而不 管螢幕間之切換。按紐1至55以自上之顺序,予Μ分配至 模式控制(模式),組控制(組),照明器具控制 (減光器/ 個別),照明器具控制(減光器/個別),及電動窗帘/風扇 線圈簞元控制(電動器具或類似器具)。在觸模(壓下)在 觸控板12對應於按鈕S1至S5之任何部位時,螢幕顯示便切 換至一對應於如此選擇之控制之螢幕。記號Η予以指示至 一選定按鈕Si至Si之側面,藉以告知使用者目前選擇何一 螢幕。二按鈕L及Sv予Μ分配至照明器具控制之原因,為 照明器具係Μ數量多於所控制之任何其他負載予Μ提供。 首先,將簡短解釋通過使用上述設定操作端子1之負載 之控制。在控制(照明或消光)照明器具(白熾燈或螢光燈) 時,顯示一諸如圖34中所示者之螢幕。照明器具之照明及 消光可藉一單一操作區段予Κ控制。對照而言,照明器具 _ β κ — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -- 裳-----I--訂 -----I---線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 65 A7 435049« B7 五、發明說明(63) 之變暗需要一 UP操作區段作為操作區段I供指令照明器具 增加光輸出,一 DOWN操作區段*供指令照明器具減少光輸 出,及一 0N/0FF操作區段*供指令照明器具予Μ照明或熄 滅。而且*也需要一水準顯示區段,供指示光輸出之水準 *及一照明/消光顯示區段,供指示照明器具予Μ照明或 熄滅。也可使用ON/OFF操作區段及照明/消光顯示區段, 供僅照明或熄滅照明器具。總之*也可使用供變暗目的之 操作及顯示區段,作為僅供照明及消光目的之操作及顯示 區段。為此原因,提供一 UP按鈕S,, ,一 DOWN按紐Su *及 一 ON/OFF按鈕,供照明器具操作區段。而且,提供一 照明/消光顧示器區段D,及一條指示型水準指示器D&供 顯示區段。照明/消光顯示區段Du予从重®在0H/0FF按鈕 Se 。依照明器具之狀態而定,選擇姓指示字"0N”或"OFF” 。在使用者指令僅照明或消光照明器具之情形* UP按鈕 Sm ,DOWN按鈕Sa及水準指示器Chi均不予Μ指示,但顯 示0H/0FF按鈕13及照明/消光指示器Du 。而且,可使用一 符號,供照明/消光顯示區段Du - 設定操作端子1可完成負載之組控制。為了完成組控制 ,必要指定將行Μ —集體方式控制諸物體之何者。而且* 設定操作端子1可通過模式控制控制負載。為了完成模式 控制,必要指定控制諸物體之何者,Μ及諸物體予Μ控制 之狀態之性質。 稍後將說明將行受到組及模式控制之負載,及負載予Μ 控制之狀態。如果已設定組控制,響應使用者觸摸按鈕Si 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) Γ Γ--HI·!^i---1ΪΙ 訂 ----I---線 (請先閱讀背面之汊意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 66 4350 49«« A7 B7五、發明說明(G 4) ,而出現一相似於圖34中所示螢幕” DIMMER/INDIVIDUAL( 減光器/個別)”之螢幕。如果觸摸螢幕上之任一顯示之操 作區段,便Μ集體方式使許多負載成相同受控制之吠態。 因此,如果使用者希望集體控制許多照明器具之啟動或中 斷,或增加或減少照明器具之光輸出,照明器具予以受到 組控制或組變暗。而且,主衰減器k及S彳連同一條指示型 水準指示器Dt予以顯示在液晶區段11之螢幂。使用主衰減 器S8及S1»使能組變暗操作*藉以增加或減少所有照明器具 之光輸出。此等主衰減器Sg及Sq甚至出現在"dimmeu/ INDIVIDUAL)”蟹幕及"OTHER ELECTRICAUY-p〇yERED 0R L I K E A P P L I A N C E (其他電動器具或類似器具),,g幕。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝---- 由制 /1- 控 SI式 紐横 按使 之故 況 ’ 情擇 於選 應 Μ 對予 摸況 觸狀 便之 ί 間 制房 控用 式使 模據 定根 設制 已控 果式 如模 於 況 狀 之 房)-用制 使控 於式 應模 對示 質表 性 K 之用 上 義 意 此 在 鈕 按 示 所 中 3 3 圓 如 出 況抖 清 S f 至 ,4-1 詞 1 現 訂---------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 部應控 下對被 之摸體 幕觸物 螢者之 之用定 11使設 段在先 區。預 晶況 , 液情時 在別一 各 於 應 對 Η S 至 41 S 紐 按 等 此 之 S 至 S 紐 按 之 況 情 望 希 於 態 狀 之 況 情 於 應 對 至 制 妞子 按端 lit 作 $ 操控 或至 紐令 按 指 段出 i 0 作 操子 如端 諸作 操 已 1± 定 設 在 示 指 之 號 符 及 制 控 移 轉 自 撺 根 後 處 部 内 之 rH 子 端 作 操 定 設 藉 容 內 之 料 資 制 控 ο 回 返改 ^ K 3 予 器理 性設 之要 制必 控故 歷 ’ 經制 所控 載式 負模 令 及 指組 可成 子成 端完 作可 操統 定系 設視 , 監 述控 所遙 上於 Μ 由 ο. 5 如 ο 質 Μ氏張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) -67 - 435049、‘ A7 B7 五、發明說明(b5) 定予以控制之負載與操作區段間之對應,以及將行受到組 或模式控制之負載與負載予Μ控制狀態間之對應。為此目 的,設定操作端子配備有供指令負載之設定開關SW。在選 擇住一按鈕S,至Ss時,壓下設定開闞SW。如果選擇按紐S, ,可設定模式控制之性質。遘擇如果按紐Si,可設定組控 制之性質。如果選擇任何按鈕Si至Si,可設定予Μ控制之 負載與搡作區段間之對應。 下列解釋適用於茌遙控監視系統進入設定模式時系統之 操作,由於使用者壓下設定開赌SW,並保持三秒或更久。 如圖35中所示* 一供設定模式之初始螢幕使使用者能選擇 —希望之設定操作。在本案實施例,使用者可自"IHITIAL SETTING(初始設定)”,” ADDRESS SETTING(位址設定)”, ”LOAD SYMBOL SETTING (負載符號設定)”,"PATTERH/ GROUP SETTING(模式 /組設定)”,"OPERATION LOCK SETTING (操作鎖設定)",及”SCREEN CLEAN ING MODE ( 螢幕清除槙式”,選擇一所希望者。使用者觸摸任一操作 區段;亦即,按鈕Si至Sn,藉Μ可選擇一希望之設定操 作。如Μ上所述,通過使用重叠在螢幕之觸控板12,進行 各種設定操作。配合螢幕之下列說明,操作所需要者以外 其他按紐,自圖中省略,但螢幕實際與圖33中所示者相同。 如圖35中所示,一按紐Sti槱記"N0RHAL(正常)”指示在 設定模式之遘擇螢幕之右側部份。茌觸摸按鈕Sr時,另 —蛋蘗出現在一控制模式,在此模式,僅指不按鈕Si主Si 在圈35中所示之螢幕選擇"INITIAL SETTING(初始設定 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x 297公釐) ~ 68 ~ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 装!! —訂- — !!1!線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 435049、《 A7 B7 五、發明說明(β5) (請先閱讀背面之注項再填寫本頁) 定予Μ控制之負載與操作區段間之對應,以及將行受到組 或模式控制之負載與負載予Μ控制狀態間之對應。為此目 的’設定操作端子配備有供指令負載之設定開關SW。在選 擇任一按紐Si至Ss時,歷下設定開關SW。如果選擇按紐s, *可設定模式控制之性質。擇如果按紐Si,可設定組控 制之性質。如果選擇任何按鈕Si至Si·,可設定予以控制之 負載與操作區段間之對應。 下列解釋逋用於在遙控監視糸統進人設定模式時系統之 操作*由於使用者壓下設定開關SW*並保持三秒或更久。 如圖35中所示* —供設定模式之初始螢幕使使用者能選擇 一希望之設定操作。在本案實施例,使用者可自"INITIAL SETT IHG (初始設定)”,” ADDRESS SETTING (位址設定)”, ”LOAD SYMBOL SETTING (負載符號設定)”,"PATTERH/ GROUP SETTING (模式 /組設定)"* "OPERATION LOCK SETTING (操作鎖設定)”,及"SCREEH CLEANING M0DE( 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 螢幕清除模式”,選擇一所希望者。使用者觸摸任一操作 區段;亦即,按鈕S7I至3>,藉Μ可選擇一希望之設定操 作。如Μ上所述,通過使用重鲞在螢幕之觸控板12’進行 各種設定操作。配合螢幕之下列說明,操作所需要者以外 其他按紐,自圖中省略,但螢幕實際與圖33中所示者相同。 如圖35中所示* 一按鈕Sti標記” NORMAL(正常)"指示在 設定模式之選擇螢幕之右側部份。在觸摸按紐Sil時’另 一螢幕出現在一控制模式,在此模式,僅指示按紐S,至Si。 在圖35中所示之螢幕選擇” INITIAL SETTING(初始設定 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 297公髮) A7 B7 435049^ 五、發明說明(〖W) ),,按鈕時*可設定設定操作端子丨之基本操作參數,諸如 螢幕之亮度或嚇聯發聲器2S之音量。特別是,使用者可自 "CONTRAST SETTIG(對比設定),,操作,"SETTING 〇F SCREEN SHUTOFF(營幕軸斷之設定)”操作,,'〇pERATI〇N SOUND SETT ING (操作聲設定)”操作,及” SETT ING 〇F AUTOMATIC SCUEEli ILLUMIANTION (自動螢幕照明之設定 )"操作選擇任一操作。可控制螢幕液晶區段11之對比,以 設定在輸入操作結束時之瞬間與在螢幕關斷時之瞬間,其 間之持續時間,以確定在壓下按紐時是否發出操作聲,及 確定在顯示空白蛮幕之時間,是否顯示在操作狀態負載L 之改變。 在圖35中所不之餐ϋ選擇,,ADDRESS SETTING(位址設定 )”操作時,可如圖15中所示,設定並確定端子之位址。在 此設定模式’自按鈕sigS5選擇一按鈕時,僅四按紐Sf, 顯示為主動操作區段,諸如圖37, 3 9及41中所示者 。特別是’由於四開閱予以分配至一通道,四按鈕至 Sw顯示為有效操作區段。 設若在圖15中所示之螢幕壓下” pATTERN(模式),,按紐S1 ’蛋幕改變至圖37中所示之螢幕。除了在靨37中所示螢幕 之右惻部份所指示之”正常π按鈕S6|外,指示一,,RET[JRN( 返回)”按紐S &。如果鳙摸按鈕s ti ,螢幕改變至先前螢幕 。如果在圖36或37中所示之螢蘗選擇任一按鈕%至^ , 蟹薄改變至圖3δ中所示之螢幕,在此螢幕顯示供設定端子 之位址及功能之操作區段。因此,可設定在圖37中所示之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ---- 訂---------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 _ Κίΐ _ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 4 9li A7 __B7_ 五、發明說明(67) 螢蘗,自按紐S41至S#所選擇按紐之位址或功能。例如, 如果觸摸按鈕S* ,便改變按鈕S*之顯示狀態,藉以示按 紐Sw被選擇。如果在此狀態發現一供模式控制使用之位 址(亦即一槙式位址)已分配至按鈕*位址之值便指示 在盒B_°如果模式位址尚未分配至按紐h ,使用者可通 過使用數字小鍵盤*設定一模式位址。或則,在已分配之 模式位址改變時*則觸摸"CLEAR (清除)”按紐,藉Μ擦除 模式位址,並通過使用數字小鐽盤進人一新橫式位址。_ 38示” Ρ1"予以設定為模式位址。在圖38中所示螢幕之右側 部份指示一” SETTING(設定)”按紐S63。在模式位址已予Κ 分配至各別按紐S«至S竹後,如果觭摸按鈕5« ,便確定 分配至按紐,至S科之模式位址。 相同情形也適用於設定位址供組控制目的(亦即組位址) ,位址供滅光器/個別控制目的(亦即滅光器/個別控制位 址),及供使用於控制電動器具(亦即電動器具或類似器具 }之位址之情形。在組設定之情形,螢幕自圖39中所示者 改變至圖40中所示者。在減光器/個別設定之情形,螢幕 自圖41中所示者改變至圈42中所示者。在圖40及42中所示 之各別螢幕,示適合組控制及減光器/個別控制之設定按 紐0 在圈39中所示供設定組控制位址之螢幕,除了按紐 及Su外*在螢幕之下右部份示一供指令是否K集體方式 控制減光器水準之"GROUP DIMMER(組減光器)"按紐Sw ° 如果觸摸此按鈕Sw ,可通過組控制,Μ集體方式控制所 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 70 C請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 I------訂--------- Α7 Β7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 有照明器具之 之操作,係與 示設定適合組 所示之螢幕* 情形,負載通 預定時間期間 ,供中斷負載 Κ許多階段予 段予以選擇性 ’ 一分鐘 * 五 五、發明說明(β8) 光強度。自按鈕Sa至5糾選擇一按鈕後所需 在設定模式位址所需要者相同,藉以提示顯 控制,諸如圖40中所示者之按鈕。在圖40中 使用者可在完成供啟動負載之操作後(在此 常對應於一照明器具)*供啟動一負載僅供 之暫時照明,與在完成供中斷負載之操作後 之延遲關斷之間選擇。此控制之持續時間可 Μ設定。特別是,暫時照明操作可Μ在五階 設定(藉” ΤΕ ΜΡ 0 R A R Υ (暫時)按紐):亦即3 0秒 分鐘,一小時*及二小時。延遲關斷操作可 Μ三階段予以選擇性設定(藉"延遲"按鈕):亦即3 0秒,一 分鐘,及五分鐘。如果在設定操作之過程中作出任何誤差 *使用者觸摸” C L E A R ”按鈕。為了取消定時器控制,諸如 暫時照明或延遲關斷*使用者壓下” TIMER CLEAR(定時器 清除途)”按紐。如圖40中所示,組位址或其他設定(包括 定時器控制之設定)之细節指示在iBi 。在圖40之盒匕中 所示訊息,表示組位址為” G 1 ” *及關斷予K設定為使變為 延遲3 0秒。即使在圖1 8及1 9中所示之螢幕,也指示”設定” 按鈕Sw 。如果壓下按紐S& ,便確定組位址分配至按紐 S/h至Sw ,並且如此確定之組位址被傳輸至轉移控制器30 在圖41中所示之螢幕,指示按鈕至S叫,其為設定個 別或減光器位址之物體。如果在此螢幕選擇性觸摸h至 Sm,之任一按紐,便出現圖42中所示之螢幕。如在組控制 之情形,個別控制及減光器控制使能定時器控制。而且, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)Α4規掊(2〗0 X 297公釐) -----h r---Γ L--- Μ--------訂------I ·線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 71 A7 B7 435049轉 五、發明說明(烈) 定時器控制可予Μ逐步設定。在圖42中所示之螢幕*選擇 ”個別”或”減光器",藉Κ可選擇僅照明器具或變暗照明器 具之啟動或中斷。藉使用者觸摸”返回”按鈕,可自在盒h 内所指示之負載選擇一予以檢查負載。特別是*在在盒h 之内之諸列顯示許多負載之說明。觸摸”返回”按鈕,使茌 盒h外面所提供之游標(:(垂直移動,藉Μ指定在盒B3内所 提供之諸列之一。”返回"按鈕用Κ選擇列順序及循環。在 圖42中所示之螢幕•在螢幕之上右部份指示一 ”負載選擇’ 按鈕S#。此按紐Sw 用Μ選擇負載之類型,並根據所選 擇負載之類型,改變在螢幕之上右區段所提供指示區段以 顯示之說明。如圖43(a)至(c)中所示,可自白熾燈為變暗 操作之物體及控制多至256白熾燈之情形(圖43(a));不實 施變暗操作之情形(圖43(b));白熾燈為變暗操作之物體 及控制多至16白熾燈之情肜(圖43(c)及反相器螢光燈為變 ο 圖 者定 Μ設 希便 所 * 一si 擇紐 選按 環” 循定 序f 順下 , 壓 2 幕 4螢 圖 之 形示 情所 之中 體42 物圖 作在 操果 暗如 I I I Ϊ I h Κ--h L--- 裝 -----訂-------!線 C請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 同 際 實 子 端 $ 控. 之 址 位 制 控 時 同 同 ο 相 節配 细分 之 , 幕明 螢發 示本 所據 中根 後 滯 間 時 及 涉 不 而 Is 優 之 度 強 , 根之 號,載 訊此負 移因明 轉。照 同度組 相強成 收之多 接載許 時負變 址別度 位個強 別制之 個控載 +ί ΤΠΗΓ 用Κ負 使予明 , 載照 且負變 而明改 明改 照能 制生 控產 間統 時糸 同視 相監 際控 賁遙 在之 能明 使發 此本 因據 個 til 使 照 在 但 防 此 因 照畤生 然 同陌 雖便為 。,認 明時會 照組將 之成者 載M用 負予使 制載生 控負發 別明止 12 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS>A4規格(210 X 297公釐) // ? a Ο 4 9' a7 _B7五、發明說明(70) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 方 示 顯 1 閨 選 的 ΠΠ 用 僅 之 子 端 作 操 據 根 可 ο 明 後發 滞本 間據 時根 之 滯 間 時 及 涉 不 而 載 負 組 成 多 許 作 。 操 胗能 構供 統提 糸有 便具 方明 並發 , 本 法 控其間 別 — 時 個驵之 K 成生 予M陌 可予為 載望認 負希會 , 時將 址制者 位控用 別以使 個予生 用在發 使載止 果負防 如別从 , 個藉 且果 , 而如制 。 , 控 點此時 優因同 之。到 後制受 後 滯 使能元 其 且 並 間 空 用 佔 小 較 要 需 統及 系 » 視制 監控 控 , 遙定 ’ 設 明 供 發提 本硅 據一 根用 多 成 達Μ 藉 子明 端說 作之 操號 定編 設件 功益 多效 之本 li-ΐι 功進 種改 各並 要, 需能 所性 理 能 管功 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 0 1i 1i HI 11 11 οώ 2 元 子單 端器 作示 操顯元 定作單 設操主 段路 區電 II收 ί 接 處/ί. 子輸 端傳 展 匾 段 定 區設段 定址區段 設位制區 LL Hywu RE 址 $ 控理 位控器處 別時光_移 個同減轉 腦 電 微 主 路 電 器 動 驅 移 轉 路 電 收 接 / 輸 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 73 裝!----訂·--------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ' n 9m a7 _B7 五、發明説明(?【) 22 程 式 快 閃 記 憶 體 23 資 料 記 憶 體 η货 23 ' 閂 鎖 電 路 24 工 作 記 憶 體 24 * 液 晶 控 制 器 25 DRAM 26 控 制 對 比 調 整 區段 27 背 光 反 相 器 電 路 28 m 嘟 發 聲 器 29 電 源 電 路 30 轉 移 控 制 器 31 操 作 端 子 31a,31b 操 作 細 彌 子 31c 模 式 開 關 32 控 制 蹦 子 32 ( 1 ),32 (2), 32 (3 ) 減 光 Eg 溢 端 子 33 照 明 器 具 35 中 繼 器 (放大器) 33i-337.38i-38z 減 光 器 控 制 端 子 40 設 定 裝 置 41 前 主 wm 體 41a 凸 台 41b 防 止 抬 升 凸 片 42 矩 形 框 架 肜 中 間板 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁〕 --------訂--------後 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7-I-I.. ^ 1 I order --------- line 4 35 Ο 4 Α7 _Β7_ V. Description of the invention (50) Whether there is a match between the address of the sales department and the address of the circuit (N) . Only when the match exists, the processing for the line to be performed by M at the time of the address match is performed. Make the most N determination. Since it takes a lot of time to determine an address match, the transfer rate must be reduced or the number of circuits must be reduced. To solve this type of problem, the dimmer terminal 32 is provided with an address setting memory M, as shown in Fig. 4 * the position of each bit is associated with a single address. The one-bit flag is set to any bit position of the address setting memory M | and the address corresponding to the bit position is taken as the address of the dimmer terminal 32. Figure 4 shows a 32x8 bit map memory. The individual bits in the first column * KK are associated with 00H-1FH from left to right; the individual bits in the second column are associated with 20H-3FH from left to right; each bit in the third column , M from left to right is associated with 40 H-5FH; each bit in the fourth column · M from left to right is associated with 60H-7F Η; each bit in the fifth column is from left to 80 ; In the sixth bit, M is associated with A0H-BFH from left to right; in the t bit, each bit is associated with COH-D FT from left to right; M and in the eighth column For each bit, M is associated with E0H-FFH from left to right. The example shown in FIG. 4 determines the presence or absence of an address flag based on each bit being 0 or 1. The address flags are set to 03 and 04 (bit data takes the value of 1 at the bit position corresponding to 03 and 04). More specifically, 256-bit addresses can be set by using 256-bit data for K. The amount of data required by the system according to the present invention can be reduced to one eighth of that required by the conventional system; that is, the amount of data can be reduced from 204S bits to 256 bits. As a result, memory capacity can be reduced, which in turn leads to cost reduction. In addition, the amount of data required to set a site can be reduced, and thus the paper size for setting t can be shortened. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this Page) ------— I Order --I ------ Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -53-V. Description of Invention (5f) A7 B7 Set the Μ to the genus 10 grid element location location 1 sub-K end 0 address, when the space is present, all the addresses consumed by the matching time will be shifted as the location is fixed. The transfer of the receivable butt joint map should be in the opposite position. The bit should be in the opposite position. () When the location of the material map is calculated, i includes the number information of the package.) From time to time, flags match the address. The location setting is in place, K is the time when the ingredients are matched. The address is in the marching position. If the number is ο, the location is set. Transfer 1 time to receive the operation for the march to make the address of the matching room complete and complete the operation 1 pass. Quickly relocate and relocate at a low speed. 0 Expensive Expensive Ang ο ο 1 1 Paragraph-zone system limit The location of the sub-rates for relocation is subject to multiple channels of electricity. Use the example of the prevention rate to implement the irrespective of the sixth base and the above structure in the system of contempt monitoring and monitoring. Implement the seventh contend of the system to contend monitoring of the remote control. 31 The second release release system will control only one group. 1 Complete the implementation of the first three examples of the basis of the first three examples of the difference between the actual operation of the bad end (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) I 'II--1 Order ----- ---- Online to the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Customs and Excise Department, print the sub-terminal to the distribution point M to the 31-bit control system, and control the same time with the same pressure and control. And 4) d S closes the control group and controls the control group 1 to transmit the S L line signal through the 0P pass signal 30 signal F * = 1 for the emperor's control. No. 3 signal generator moves to stop control transfer to sister control 1 (for shifting CN 1 to transfer number * to the message output terminal for operation when the message is included -r * t \ until the joint control closes and closes to open the synchronous action Reality and 4) Stop a and block 31 to supply η including package date 1 0 3, the sub-address end position control. Seasoning. 1 of the same capital ^ Use the broken number to share the system of the China News Agency, so that you can control it at the same time or not. 0 Negative photos This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 54 Economy A7 B7_5, Invention Description (52) system printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau. Subsequently, the switch Sd * of the group control switch 31b is pressed again, so that an operation signal OP2 indicating that the operation of the switch is valid is transmitted from the group control switch 31b to the transfer controller 30. The transfer controller 30 sends a control signal CN2 (transfer signal) to the signal line Ls *, which includes the simultaneous control address shared by the operation terminals 31a (l) to 31a (4), and it associates a connection with the action of the switch Se Interrupt is active. The operation terminals 31a (l) to 31a (4) actually receive the control signal CN2 at the same time, and thereafter, the lighting load can be controlled by the action of the switch Se. In particular, the group control switch 31b according to the first embodiment is provided for locking (preventing) the operation of the other operation terminals 31a (l) to 31a (4). Only press the switch Sc! Of the sister control switch 31b, and control the lighting load by operating the terminals 31a) to 31a (4). Eighth Embodiment The remote monitoring system according to the eighth embodiment is practically exactly the same in structure as the sixth embodiment. Only the differences between the two remote monitoring systems will be explained. In the fourth embodiment, a ventilation fan L to M is connected as a load to the control terminal 32. In the fourth embodiment, a common simultaneous control address gU is assigned to the operation terminals 31a (l) to 31a (4) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, a transfer controller 30 uses a control signal CN including a simultaneous address as a synchronization signal for use with the operation indicator lamps 31a (l) to 31a (4). According to the fourth embodiment *, the operation display lamp can blink in the same cycle, and thus the operation (start) state of the load L can be checked (perceived). The ninth embodiment -S5'- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------- L ----------- II ^- ---- I --- < Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 435049 ^ Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (ϋ) Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Figure 31 shows a remote monitoring according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention System, an example of its configuration. Throughout the specification, the terms "up", "down", "right", "left", "'front", "rear", etc., are used herein to specify when they are oriented in the direction in which they are intended to be used by Μ. The constituent elements of the present invention. The exemplified remote monitoring system is mainly different from the remote monitoring system described in the first to eighth embodiments in that the system includes setting operation terminals 12 and 12. However, the address of the operating terminal and the address of the control terminal are configured so that they correspond to each other, and K and a corresponding correspondence table are temporarily stored in a transfer controller 30, which are all the same. A correspondence table showing correspondence between addresses is set to the transfer controller 30 by using the setting operation terminal 1. If the addresses of the corresponding operating terminals and control terminals are set to exactly the same value, it is easy to understand the correspondence between the addresses. In this sense * the concept of "using M channel"> M designates a single bit address. The addresses of the operating terminals and the address control terminals corresponding to each other in a one-to-one relationship are set to the same channel. One channel (bit Address), specify a load number * to control. Four loads L. For example, the "0" channel enables to control the number of loads allocated by four loads L from the factory to "4". Channels "(T's load L distributed load number" 1B, pseudo-indicated by "0-1". Therefore, the channels and load numbers set in this way are used as a pair, so the operation terminal and control terminal can be configured for M In order to correspond to each other, in the present invention, the remote monitoring system includes an incandescent lamp L; fluorescent lamps each have an inverter lighting device; a fan coil U of an air conditioner; and a speaker k. Incandescent lamp L1 is dimmed Controller control terminals 331 to 333 (1500W, 800W * and 5001Π to M control * whose capacity corresponds to the number of lights --IJI BU ^ ----- I < JI! II — Order · -------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 56 4350 49 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs B7_V. Invention Description (Γ) 4). The fluorescent lamp Li is controlled by a relay control terminal 32 for controlling lighting and extinction, and a dimmer control terminal 33 for controlling light output. The subtractor control terminal 33 * transmits a voltage signal of 0 to 10 volts to the lighting device *, and the lighting device changes the intensity of the light emitted from the fluorescent lamp L by the voltage signal. A control terminal 33, M for three-stage control of the fan coil U controls the operation rate of the fan coil U in three stages. The volume of the speaker L is controlled by a control terminal 3 37 for the volume control purpose. Other electric appliances, such as electric window shades * electric screens, and ventilation fans, can be connected to the M as other loads to the remote monitoring system. The remote monitoring system includes, as an operation terminal, a control terminal 31 having a switch So identical in structure to the switches in the first to eighth embodiments; a dimmer operation terminal 38, and 3; and an operation terminal (a Type of monitoring terminal for allowing various sensors to be connected for contact input to produce contact outputs. Even a wireless transmitter 34a is provided for the operating section and a wireless transmitter 34a is used in conjunction with a wireless receiver 34b * Yike also uses M to form an operation terminal. Two dimmer operation terminals 38! And 3S, in terms of the R size and structure of the operation section * are basically different from each other. The dimmer operation terminal 3 includes a smaller The button handle > and the dimmer operation terminal 38m includes a larger piano handle-type handle, which is pivotally supported on one side. The dimmer operation terminals 3 core and 3L are identical in basic operation. As shown in the figure In order to extend the signal line Ls, a repeater (amplifier) 35 is connected to the signal line Ls, and the transmission signal is transferred without enabling attenuation by M. In the illustrated example, the second operation terminal 1 is set, and ^ I M connected to Relay 35. Setting operation terminal 1 provides color indication, and setting operation terminal U provides single--1--I ---- I ---- J ----- I--Order · --- ----- line < Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to the ten national standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 57 & ----—-1 Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Consumer Cooperative A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (55) Color display. The color display setting operation terminal is supplied with a 24V AC power from a remote control transformer (to be described later) 36. The color display and the monochrome display are almost the same in terms of practical functions, so the operation terminals ^ and 丨 are referred to as "setting operation terminal 1" * without dividing lines between them. The rules will explain the procedures for setting corresponding data. The setting procedure can be divided into three phases: a pre-processing phase, at which phase the transmission of the corresponding data is started; a transmission processing phase, during which the actual transmission of the corresponding data is performed; κ and a post-processing phase, at which Corresponding data transmission. When the operation is started, the transfer controller 30 sets its transmission status to "NO TRANSHISSION (not transmitted)", which means that the corresponding data is not transmitted. In other words * The transfer controller 30 enters the same operation mode as a conventional transfer controller in which the load L is controlled. Unless an interrupt signal is generated * to determine if data transmission should take place. If the data is not transmitted, the transfer controller 30 performs a full-time polling operation that repeatedly generates a virtual horizontal transfer signal. During the pre-processing phase * if an attempt is made to transmit confrontation data to the transfer controller 30, the terminal generates an interrupt signal. Therefore * interrupt signal is detected by K. When the interrupt signal is detected, the transfer controller 30 specifies a terminal to issue an interrupt signal and determine an interrupt request. This processing is the same as that performed when the load L is controlled. When transmitting corresponding data, the setting operation terminal 1 issues a data transfer request to the transfer controller 30. In order to indicate that the corresponding data is being transferred in the forward direction *, the transfer status of the controller 30 is set to "TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS". If no data transfer request is issued from the setting operation terminal 1, this indicates the normal control of the load L, and thus the transfer controller 30 controls the load L according to the request. f The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). 5 8 — V. Description of the invention (A7 B7 Consumption by Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs) The cooperative printed signal is exchanged between the transfer controller 30 and the setting operation terminal 1 in the following ways. More specifically, * the setting operation terminal 1 sends an interrupt signal. In response to this interrupt signal * the transfer controller 30 sets an interrupt flag Mark * 俾 to perform interrupt polling operation and wait for the address of setting operation terminal I to return. When receiving the address of setting operation terminal 1, transfer controller 30 monitors a request from setting operation terminal 1. In response to monitoring the transfer control In response to the request of the device 30, the setting operation terminal 1 requires the transfer controller 30 to receive the corresponding data. When the request is received, the transfer controller 30 clears the interrupt flag. Moreover, in order to enable the exchange of corresponding assets, the transfer controller 30 guarantees the address The 256 bytes of the part are used to store the corresponding data. The 256 bytes are taken as a unit and called a page; therefore, one page of the address part is guaranteed. When one page of the address part is ensured, the address part for temporarily storing the corresponding data is reported to the setting operation terminal 1, and the setting operation terminal 1 is required to start transmitting the corresponding data. After the operation terminal 1 has been requested to be set to transmit the corresponding data, The transfer controller 30 monitors the status of the corresponding data transmitted from the setting operation terminal 1. When the notification that the corresponding data may be transmitted (that is, the notification of "TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS") returns from the setting operation terminal 1, the transfer controller 30 enters the human transmission process Phase. In the transmission processing stage, set the operation terminal 1 to transmit the corresponding data to the transfer controller 30. If the corresponding data is sent in a large amount in one transmission * Only a part of the corresponding data is transmitted. If the corresponding data transfer has not been completed , Set the operation terminal 1 to send an interrupt signal again, and repeat the above-mentioned processing operation, and continue to transmit the corresponding data by M. More specifically * The transfer controller 30 monitors the transmission from the set operation terminal 1 (please read the precautions on the back before filling in (This page) ill — —-- Order --------- This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CN S) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 59 435049 «! A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (57) The amount of corresponding data printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs * and causing setting operation terminal 1 to return one bit Group counter signal. Subsequently, the transfer controller 30 monitors the corresponding asset section, and causes the setting operation terminal 1 to transmit corresponding data in a number of bytes specified by the byte counter signal. Here, instead of transmitting all corresponding data at one time, The corresponding data is divided into many data segments. The transmission of the corresponding data from the set operation terminal 1 to the transfer controller 3 is repeated until M completes the corresponding data of the wheel in the number of bytes specified by the byte counter signal. Finally, the transfer controller 30 requires the setting operation terminal 1 to issue a checksum on the corresponding asset. Upon receiving the checksum, the transfer controller 30 determines whether a transmission error has occurred. The corresponding data includes the number of modes used to identify the mode that will be controlled by the mode, or the number of groups used to identify the groups that will be controlled by the group; the address of the load L to be controlled by M; nature. According to the content of the corresponding data transmitted from the setting operation terminal 1 to the transfer controller 30 when dividing into M, > The correspondence table for mode control or group control is temporarily stored in the transfer controller 30. The post-processing operation is an operation for setting the transfer status of the transfer controller 30 to "Η0 TRANSMISSION". After the corresponding data is set, the transfer controller 30 monitors the transfer status of the setting operation terminal 1 and confirms that the material transfer is completed. Then, a data transmission completion instruction is issued, and M informs the setting operation terminal 1 to complete all processing operations related to the transmission of the corresponding data. Under these procedures, the load L can be controlled by K, and no control for the load L has been generated. The idle time at the time of data, the corresponding data for mode or group control purpose can be transmitted from the setting operation terminal 1 to the transfer controller 30. As described above, in this embodiment * the corresponding data is divided into segments in YuK (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 60 4 35049, * A7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs B7_ V. Description of the invention (58), the set operation terminal 1 is transmitted to the transfer controller 30 at different times. The reason is that the same amount of corresponding subjects are transmitted at one time. A longer transfer time is required, thereby increasing the probability of a time period during which load L cannot be controlled. As long as the corresponding material is sold to W transmission and the idle time that is not used to control load L is used, the rest can be divided. Transfer the corresponding data without introducing the time period that the load L cannot be controlled by M. In order to transmit the corresponding data when it is in the barking state, the transfer controller 30 retains the data about the transmission status. By saying "TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS ", And the data indicating" NO TRANSMISSION ", the transfer controller 30 can determine whether the corresponding data segments that have not been transmitted are still maintained. Therefore, if the transfer status is" TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS ", the transfer controller is requested 30 controls the load L, and the transfer controller 30 controls the load L, which takes precedence over the corresponding data of the wheel. After the control of the load L is completed, the transmission confrontation data is restored, and the corresponding data is transmitted through M to prevent the control of the load L p Next, the configuration of the setting operation terminal 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30 ', the setting operation terminal 1 includes a self-display LCD. The display and a backlight are attached to the liquid crystal display to form a single piece of liquid crystal section Π: K and a transparent touchpad 12 overlapping the screen of the crystal section 11. A liquid crystal display including a matrix pixel is used for the liquid crystal Section II, in which the graphics are displayed by a combination of pixels. The touchpad 12 includes a transparent sheet member * and a plurality of contacts formed from the transparent electrodes and arranged on the sheet member. The touchpad 12 is a resistance pressure-sensitive type. And outputs the position of a finger or the like to the touch panel member. The setting operation terminal 1 includes a transmission / reception circuit 21 ′ which is connected to a signal line Ls * connected to the transfer controller 30 and exchanges the transfer signal ( Please read the note on the back before filling in this page> This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 61 4 350 4 9 'A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (59) Ministry of Economic Affairs Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau. The transmission / reception circuit 21 'is connected to a host microcomputer 20' shared between the transmission processing section and the control section. The main emblem computer 20 'operates according to programs and data, which are written to the flash memory 22 by the M writer. The function data for determining the address and the function of the terminal are written to at least a part of the flash memory 22. Moreover, existing data for the remote monitoring system, such as various messages and symbols, are also stored in the flash memory 22 to the M. The main microcomputer 2 0 ′ transfers the data to a liquid crystal controller 24 ′ * via an interlock circuit 2 3 ′ for instructing the display content in the liquid crystal section 11. By using data temporarily stored in the DRAM 25, the liquid crystal controller 24 'indicates predetermined information at a predetermined position in the crystal segment 11. As will be described later, the contents of the DRAM 25 can be set by the user. In particular, * the user can set the main microcomputer 20 'to the setting mode by using the touch panel 12 * by setting the content * and the content thus set is stored in the DRA M2 5. The main microcomputer 20 'is set to the horizontal operation mode, and the touch panel 12 * is operated so as to set the information to be displayed in the tired section by using the assets stored in the DRAM 25. The contrast of the liquid crystal section 11 and the brightness of the backlight are adjusted by the main microcomputer 20 '* by controlling the contrast adjustment section 26 and the backlight inverter circuit 27. Further, a beep sounder 28 is connected to the main microcomputer 20 '. In case the user touches a predetermined part of the touch panel 12 or performs a failed operation, the beep sounder 28 is activated, and the user is informed by M to accept the input or a failed operation. Different sounds should be set up for unqualified operation and accepting input. The setting operation terminal 11 includes a backlight, and therefore requires higher power. For this reason | It is set that the internal power of the operation terminal 1 is not supplied from the signal line Ls, and the operation terminal 1 is set to supply a power circuit 29 to the rectifier and -Λ 0 _ This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) 62 ------ r k --- Γ ---- ----- I-^ --- I ----- (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again for details) 435049 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of Invention (GO) Stable communication 24 volts. The 24 volts AC supplied to the power supply circuit 29 is supplied from a remote control transformer disposed on a distribution board together with the transfer controller 30 to the M. This remote-control transformer is a conventional relay for supplying power to a remote-control relay that can be switched without using a transfer signal, but activated or interrupted by another switch. The 24 volts AC supplied from the remote control transformer is supplied to the setting operation terminal 1, so it is unnecessary to directly supply power to the setting operation terminal 1 from a commercial power source such as AC 180 volts. Since 5 volts, 12 volts *, and 20 volts are used as the internal power and the voltage is lower than 24 volts, a simple configuration such as the required voltage stabilization circuit is used to obtain the desired voltage. The above-mentioned setting operation terminal 1 has the structure shown in FIG. 32. In particular, the setting operation terminal 1 is constituted by an operation display unit 2 having a liquid crystal section 11 and a touch panel 12, and a main unit 3 * for accommodating other circuits, which may be removably connected together. The operation display unit 2 includes a front body 41 whose front surface (that is, the upper surface shown in FIG. 3) is opened by M; I is set at the boss 4U, and provided in the upright position in the bottom surface of the body 41 The liquid crystal section Π; M and the sheet-shaped touch panel 12 placed on the front surface of the fatigue crystal section 11. A rectangular frame-shaped intermediate plate 42 is superposed on the front side of the touch panel 12. One of the monitor sections of the liquid crystal section 11 is exposed by a window 42 a formed in the middle plate 42. Further, a rectangular decorative plate 43 is placed on the front surface of the middle plate 42. The front body 41, the intermediate plate 42, and the decorative plate 43 are formed of an insulating synthetic resin. Moreover, the touchpad 12 is activated when it is depressed by a finger or other member. A replaceable transparent protective sheet 13 is marked with M on the surface of the touchpad 12, so that fingerprints are prevented from remaining on the touchpad 12. If the protective sheet 13 is contaminated by fingerprints or dust, the size of this paper applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 63 ---------- --- yr Packing ---- --Order ---- I --- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) / Q v .. V. Description of invention (G2) A7 B7 Printed by the member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Consumer Cooperative It is formed by the combination of the figure and characters indicated in the liquid crystal section 11 and the touch panel 12. If the information about the control of all loads to be displayed and the operation section is displayed to the single screen of the liquid crystal section 11 * A large screen is required for the LCD section 11, so setting the operation terminal 1 is expensive and cumbersome. In order to prevent this problem, the amount of data displayed on each screen of liquid crystal segment 1 is low, and the data on the display and operation segments of many loads can be pointed by switching screen guards ττϊ in other crystal display τκ sections 11 ° In particular, the interpretation of the operational nature of the touchpad 12 * is associated with the screen display appearing in the liquid crystal section 11 to be changed. As shown in Fig. 33 * On the screen of the LCD 11, the five buttons S1 to S5 for switching the screen are indicated on the left. These buttons $ 1 to 35 are always indicated by M, regardless of the switching between screens. Buttons 1 to 55 are assigned from top to mode control (mode), group control (group), lighting control (dimmer / individual), lighting control (dimmer / individual), and Electric curtain / fan coil unit control (electric appliances or similar appliances). When the touch mold is pressed (depressed) at any part of the touch panel 12 corresponding to the buttons S1 to S5, the screen display is switched to a screen corresponding to the control thus selected. The symbol Η indicates to the side of a selection button Si to Si, thereby informing the user which screen is currently selected. The reason why the two buttons L and Sv are allocated to M for lighting fixture control is that the number of lighting fixtures is more than any other load controlled by M. First, the control of the load by setting the operation terminal 1 by using the above will be explained briefly. When controlling (illumination or extinction) a lighting fixture (incandescent or fluorescent), a screen such as that shown in FIG. 34 is displayed. Lighting and extinction of luminaires can be controlled by K in a single operating section. In contrast, lighting appliances _ β κ — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) ----------- I--Order ----- I --- Line paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 65 A7 435049 «B7 V. Dimming of invention description (63) requires an UP operating section as the operating section I for instructing the lighting equipment to increase light output, a DOWN The operation section * is for instructing the lighting device to reduce light output, and a 0N / 0FF operation section * is for instructing the lighting device to light or extinguish. And * also requires a level display section for indicating the level of light output * and a lighting / extinction display section for indicating lighting fixtures to illuminate or go out. It is also possible to use ON / OFF operating sections and lighting / dimming display sections for lighting only or extinguishing lighting appliances. In short * the operation and display section for dimming purposes can also be used as the operation and display section for lighting and extinction purposes only. For this reason, an UP button S ,,, a DOWN button Su * and an ON / OFF button are provided for the lighting appliance operation section. Furthermore, a lighting / dimming indicator section D and an indicator type level indicator D & are provided for displaying the section. The Illumination / Extinction Display Section Du 从 重重 on the 0H / 0FF button Se. Depending on the state of the appliance, select the last name indicator "quote 0N" or "quote OFF". In the case where the user instructs only lighting or extinction lighting appliances * the UP button Sm, the DOWN button Sa and the level indicator Chi are not instructed by M, but the 0H / 0FF button 13 and the illumination / dimming indicator Du are displayed. Moreover, a symbol can be used for the lighting / dimming display section Du-Set operation terminal 1 to complete the group control of the load. In order to accomplish group control, it is necessary to specify which of the objects will be controlled collectively. And * setting operation terminal 1 can control the load by mode control. In order to complete the mode control, it is necessary to specify who controls the objects, and the nature of the states to which the objects control. The load that will be controlled by the group and mode, and the state that the load is controlled by M will be explained later. If the group control has been set, respond to the user's touch of the button Si This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Γ Γ--HI ·! ^ I --- 1ΪΙ Order ---- I --- line (please read the notice on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 66 4350 49 «« A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (G 4), and a similar to the figure appears The screen shown in 34 is “DIMMER / INDIVIDUAL”. If you touch any of the displayed operating sections on the screen, the collective mode brings many loads into the same controlled barking state. Therefore, if the user wishes to collectively control the activation or interruption of many lighting fixtures, or increase or decrease the light output of the lighting fixtures, the lighting fixtures are subject to group control or group dimming. Further, the main attenuators k and S 彳 are displayed in the liquid crystal section 11 with the power of a fluorescent indicator Dt. Use master faders S8 and S1 »to enable dimming operation * to increase or decrease the light output of all lighting fixtures. These main attenuators Sg and Sq even appear in "dimmeu / INDIVIDUAL)" crab screen and "OTHER ELECTRICAUY-p〇yERED 0R LIKEAPPLIANCE (other electric appliances or similar appliances), g screen. (Please read the back of the first Please fill in this page again) Installation ---- by system / 1- control SI-style button cross-press to make the situation 'Choose to choose the application M to the touch of the situation ί room-based control-type use (The model is based on a controlled fruit model, such as a model in a conditional room.)-The use of the control model to show the quality of the character K means that the 3 3 circle in the button press is shown. State Shaoqing S f to, 4-1 Word 1 is now ordered --------- The Printing Department of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs should control the behavior of those who touch the screen and touch the screen. Use setting 11 to set the segment ahead of schedule. In the pre-crystal condition, the liquid condition should be dealt with separately. S to 41 S button Press the S to S button Press the situation to be in favor of the situation To control the girl, press the end lit for $ manipulation or press the button to segment i 0 as an operator. 1 ± The setting of the sign symbol and the control control are transferred from the rH sub-end in the rear part of the root to make the setting of the material control in the borrowing capacity. Ο Return change ^ K 3 The control of the rational setting of the device must be controlled Therefore, the calendar's controlled load-type negative model order and finger group can be developed into a complete set of operable systems. The monitoring and control institute can be remotely located at Μ by ο. 5 Such as the quality of M ′s scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) -67-435049, 'A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (b5) Correspondence between the load to be controlled and the operating section, and the line to be controlled by the group or mode Correspondence between the load and the control state of the load. For this purpose, the setting operation terminal is equipped with a setting switch SW for commanding the load. When a button S is selected to Ss, the setting switch SW is depressed. If you choose to press Button S, can set the properties of the mode control. If you press the button Si, you can set the properties of the group control. If you select any of the buttons Si to Si, you can set the correspondence between the load controlled by the M and the working section. The following Explanation applies to 茌 Remote Depending on the operation of the system when the system enters the setting mode, as the user depresses the setting bet SW and keeps it for three seconds or more. As shown in Figure 35 * An initial screen for the setting mode allows the user to choose-hope it Set operation. In the embodiment of the present case, the user can select "IHITIAL SETTING", "ADDRESS SETTING", "LOAD SYMBOL SETTING", and "PATTERH / GROUP SETTING" Setting) "," OPERATION LOCK SETTING ", and" SCREEN CLEAN ING MODE "to select a desired one. The user touches any operation section; that is, the button Si From Sn, you can select a desired setting operation by using M. As described above, you can perform various setting operations by using the touchpad 12 superimposed on the screen. With the following instructions on the screen, you can use buttons other than those required by the operation. It is omitted from the figure, but the screen is actually the same as that shown in Fig. 33. As shown in Fig. 35, the button Sti 槱 " N0RHAL (normal) " indicates in the right part of the selection screen of the setting mode.茌 When the button Sr is touched, another—egg appears in a control mode. In this mode, only the screen selection shown in circle 35 of the button Si main Si is indicated. INITIAL SETTING National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x 297 mm) ~ 68 ~ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Packing! —Order — — !!! System 435049, "A7 B7 V. Invention Description (β5) (Please read the note on the back before filling out this page) Correspondence between the load assigned to the M control and the operating section, and the load subject to the group or mode control Corresponds to the control state of the load and M. For this purpose, the setting operation terminal is provided with a setting switch SW for commanding the load. When selecting any of the buttons Si to Ss, the setting switch SW is recorded. If the button s is selected, * The nature of the mode control can be set. If you press the button Si, you can set the nature of the group control. If you select any of the buttons Si to Si, you can set the correspondence between the load to be controlled and the operating section. The following explanations are used for The operation of the system when the remote monitoring system enters the setting mode * As the user presses the setting switch SW * and holds it for three seconds or more. As shown in Figure 35 *-The initial screen for the setting mode allows the user to select Hope setting In the example of this case, the user can set the "INITIAL SETT IHG (Initial Setting)", "ADDRESS SETTING", "LOAD SYMBOL SETTING", " PATTERH / GROUP SETTING ( Mode / group setting) " * " OPERATION LOCK SETTING "and" SCREEH CLEANING M0DE "(Printed Screen Clearing Mode for Employees' Cooperatives of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs", select a desired one. The user touches any operation section; that is, buttons S7I to 3 >, by which M can select a desired setting operation. As described above, various setting operations are performed by using the touch panel 12 'on the screen. With the following description of the screen, buttons other than those required for operation are omitted from the figure, but the screen is actually the same as that shown in Figure 33. As shown in Figure 35 * One button Sti mark "NORMAL" indicates the right part of the selection screen in the setting mode. When the button Sil is touched, another screen appears in a control mode. In this mode, Only indicate the button S to Si. Select the screen shown in Figure 35 "INITIAL SETTING (Initial setting of this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 297 issued) A7 B7 435049 ^ V. Description of the invention (〖W)), when the button is pressed *, you can set the basic operation parameters of the operation terminal, such as the brightness of the screen or the volume of the 2S. In particular, the user can operate the "CONTRAST SETTIG (contrast setting),", "SETTING 〇F SCREEN SHUTOFF", "'〇pERATI〇N SOUND SETT ING (operation sound setting ) "Operation," and "SETT ING 〇F AUTOMATIC SCUEEli ILLUMIANTION (Setting of automatic screen lighting)" operation select any operation. You can control the contrast of LCD screen section 11 to set the moment at the end of the input operation and the screen The instant at the time of the shutdown, and the duration between them, to determine whether the operation sound is made when the button is pressed, and whether the change in the operating state load L is displayed at the time when the blank screen is displayed. When the menu is selected, when ADDRESS SETTING is performed, the terminal address can be set and determined as shown in FIG. 15. When one button is selected from the button sigS5 in this setting mode, only four buttons Sf are displayed as active operation sections, such as those shown in FIGS. 37, 39, and 41. In particular, since four channels are assigned to one channel, four buttons to Sw are displayed as effective operation sections. Suppose that the screen shown in FIG. 15 is pressed "pATTERN (mode), and the button S1 'Egg Screen is changed to the screen shown in Fig. 37. Except as indicated by the right part of the screen shown in Fig. 37 "Normal π button S6 |, indicating one, RET [JRN (return)" button S &. If you touch the button s ti, the screen changes to the previous screen. If the screen shown in Figure 36 or 37 Select any button from% to ^ to change the crab thin to the screen shown in Figure 3δ. This screen displays the operation section for setting the address and function of the terminal. Therefore, it can be set on the paper shown in Figure 37 Standards apply to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) < Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) ---- Order --------- Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics _ Κί_ _ Employees’ Cooperative Cooperation of the Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du printed 4 9li A7 __B7_ 5. Description of the invention (67) Firefly, the address or function of the selected button from buttons S41 to S #. For example, if the button S * is touched, the display state of the button S * is changed so that the button Sw is selected. If it is found in this state that an address (that is, a one-way address) for mode control has been assigned to the button * address, the value is indicated in the box B_ ° If the mode address has not been assigned to the button h, the user A pattern address can be set by using the numeric keypad *. Or, when the assigned mode address is changed * then touch the "CLEAR" button to erase the mode address and enter a new horizontal address by using the digital tablet._ "38" "P1" is set as the mode address. A "SETTING" button S63 is indicated on the right part of the screen shown in Fig. 38. After the mode address has been assigned to KK to the individual buttons S «to S, if you touch the button 5«, you are sure to assign the button to the mode address of Section S. The same situation also applies to setting addresses for group control purposes (ie, group addresses), addresses for extinguishers / individual control purposes (that is, extinguishers / individual control addresses), and for controlling electric appliances (That is, the case of the address of an electric appliance or similar appliance). In the case of group setting, the screen changes from that shown in FIG. 39 to that shown in FIG. 40. In the case of the dimmer / individual setting, the screen automatically The one shown in Fig. 41 is changed to the one shown in circle 42. The respective screens shown in Figs. 40 and 42 show settings buttons suitable for group control and dimmer / individual control. 0 is shown in circle 39. The screen for setting the group control address, except for the button and Su * In the lower right part of the screen is shown a command for instructing whether to control the level of the dimmer in the collective mode " GROUP DIMMER (group dimmer) " New Sw ° If you touch this button Sw, it can be controlled by group and M collectively. The paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 70 C Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) I ------ Order --------- Α7 Β7 Member of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs The operation of the consumer cooperatives printed with lighting appliances is suitable for the screens shown in the group *. The load can pass through a predetermined period of time for the interruption of the load. Many stages and sections are optional. One minute * Five or five. Description of the invention (Β8) Light intensity. After selecting a button from the buttons Sa to 5, it is necessary to set the address in the setting mode to be the same, so as to prompt the display control, such as the button shown in FIG. 40. In Fig. 40, the user can complete the operation for starting the load (here it usually corresponds to a lighting fixture) * for starting a load for temporary lighting only, and the delayed shutdown after completing the operation for interrupting the load Choose between. The duration of this control can be set. In particular, the temporary lighting operation can be set in five stages (borrowing) TES MP 0 RAR (temporary) button: that is, 30 seconds, one hour *, and two hours. The delayed shutdown operation can be performed in three stages. Selective setting (borrow " delay " button): namely 30 seconds, one minute, and five minutes. If any error is made during the setting operation * the user touches the "CLEAR" button. In order to cancel the timer control , Such as temporary lighting or delayed shutdown * The user presses the "TIMER CLEAR" button. As shown in Figure 40, details of the group address or other settings (including timer control settings) The indication is in iBi. The message shown in the box of Fig. 40 indicates that the group address is "G1" * and the turn-off K is set to delay 30 seconds. Even in Fig. 18 and 19 The screen shown also indicates the "Setting" button Sw. If the button S & is pressed, the group address is determined to be assigned to the buttons S / h to Sw, and the group address thus determined is transmitted to the transfer controller 30 in The screen shown in Figure 41 indicates the button to call S, which is set Individual or dimmer address object. If any of the buttons h to Sm is selectively touched on this screen, the screen shown in Figure 42 will appear. In the case of group control, individual control and dimmer Control enable timer control. Moreover, this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulations (2〗 0 X 297 mm) ----- h r --- Γ L --- Μ --- ----- Order ------ I · Line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 71 A7 B7 435049 to turn 5. Description of the invention (strong) The timer control can be set step by step. The screen shown in Fig. 42 * selects "individual" or "dimmer", and can choose to activate or interrupt only the lighting device or the dimming lighting device. By touching the "back" button, the user can select one of the loads indicated in the box h to check the load. In particular * the description of many loads is shown in the columns within box h. Touch the "back" button to make the cursor provided outside the box h (: (vertical movement, specify one of the columns provided in box B3 by M.) "Back" button to select the column order and cycle. The screen shown in Figure 42 • In the upper right part of the screen, a "load selection" button S # is indicated. This button Sw uses M to select the type of load, and changes to the top right of the screen according to the type of the selected load. The section provides instructions for displaying the section. As shown in Figures 43 (a) to (c), it is possible to control the situation from an incandescent lamp to a dimming object and control up to 256 incandescent lamps (Figure 43 (a) )); In the case of no dimming operation (Figure 43 (b)); Incandescent lamp is the object of dimming operation and the control of up to 16 incandescent lamps (Figure 43 (c) and inverter fluorescent lamp are Change ο The mapr decides M She Xi ’s office * a si chooses the button to choose the ring ”Follow the order f, press 2 screens 4 scenes in the shape of the scene, the body 42 object picture is made in the dark as III Ϊ I h Κ--h L --- Install ----- Order -------! Line C, please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Staff of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Fei Cooperative Co., Ltd. prints the same real-life end $ control. The address control is the same as that of ο, and it is subdivided into subsections, and the Mingming firefly shows that the time lag between the root of the law and the related Is is strong. , The number of the root, the negative shift is caused by the turn of the Ming. According to the strength of the same degree group, the negative indexing degree is controlled by the strong degree of the same degree + ΤΠΗΓ Use κ negative to make the Ming , When the photo is taken and the negative changes are made, the control of the production and control of the production and control of the production and control of the intergenerational control is not the same as the control of the interstitial control. However, although Tong Mo is., When it is identified, it will be used by the group to load the M to be used to make the system. The paper size applies to the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 specification (210 X 297) (Mm) //? A Ο 4 9 'a7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (70) Printed by the employee's consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The time lag between the time base and the time base and the load involved make up a lot. The operation can be used to construct a unified system, and it is possible to specify the concurrency. This law controls the difference between this time — when a K's life is to M Mo can be used as a hope, and the addressee can be used to control it. Don't use a pre-birth to prevent the fruit from being lost. If you don't follow it, you should borrow it and make it. The control point has the same effect as Ein. To the post-production system is subject to the lag enabler, and the amount of air use is relatively small. It is necessary to integrate the system and the system. The end-of-the-line operation and design of the program are multi-functional. This li-ΐι function requires various changes and needs to be able to manage the power (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 0 1i 1i HI 11 11 οώ 2 Yuan single-end device for display operation, Yuan Yuan for single-set operation, main section of the road section, electric II collection, connection / ί. Segment addressing segment setting system LL Hywu RE address (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) 73 Pack! ---- Order · -------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs' n 9m a7 _B7 V. Invention Description (? [) 22 Program Flash Memory 23 Data Memory η Goods 23 'latch circuit 24 working memory 24 * LCD controller 25 DRAM 26 control contrast adjustment section 27 backlight inverter circuit 28 m beeper 29 power circuit 30 transfer controller 31 operating terminal 31a, 31b operation 31c mode switch 32 control jumper 32 (1), 32 (2), 32 (3) dimming Eg overflow terminal 33 lighting fixture 35 repeater (amplifier) 33i-337.38i-38z dimmer control terminal 40 setting device 41 Front main wm body 41a Boss 41b Anti-lifting tab 42 Rectangle frame 肜 Middle plate (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -------- Order -------- After This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7

五、發明說明(72) 42a 42b 43 44 51b,51c 59a A , B , C , D , E 窗口 凹Π 矩彤裝飾板 埋頭螺訂 安裝件 盒安裝孔 姐 區域 區段 游標 指示型水準指示器 指示區段 照明/消光顯示區段 指示型水準指示器 組數 虛擬開闞 白熾燈 螢光燈 風.扇線圈 揚聲器 顯示區段 位址設定記憶體 按紐 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--------訂---------線 A1-A3 B1·B2,B3 盒 B11-B14,B21-B23,B31-B35 C1 D1 D3 Dll D12 G 1 , G2 , G3 K1-K3 L LI L2 L3 L4 LD M S1-S6 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 75 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(73) S8 , S9 主衰減器 S 11 ϋ P按鈕 512 DOWH 按紐 513 ΟΝ/OFF 按妞 S11-S44,S61-S65,S71-S76 按鈕 -----Γ:---Γ L--, 裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製V. Description of the invention (72) 42a 42b 43 44 51b, 51c 59a A, B, C, D, E Window recessed Π Tongtong decorative plate countersunk screw mounting bracket box installation hole area section cursor indicator type level indicator indication Section lighting / extinction display Number of segments indicating level indicator Virtual open incandescent fluorescent lamp wind Read the precautions on the back and fill in this page. C1 D1 D3 Dll D12 G 1, G2, G3 K1-K3 L LI L2 L3 L4 LD M S1-S6 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 75 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (73) S8, S9 main fader S 11 11 P button 512 DOWH button 513 ON / OFF button S11-S44, S61-S65, S71-S76 button ----- Γ: --- Γ L-- , Install -------- order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Duo printed

Sa 開關 Sb ,UP開關 Sc DOWN開關 Sd 開關 Se 作動開關 So 開關 S w 設定開關 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 76Sa switch Sb, UP switch Sc DOWN switch Sd switch Se actuated switch So switch S w setting switch This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

435049^ 頜 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 1, 一種遙控監視系統*包含: 許多操作端子,其每一予以分配位址,一操作區段提供 在每一操作端子; 許多控制端子*連接至分別分配獨特位址之負載,每一 控制端子設有一端子處理區段; 一訊號線,操作端子及控制端子通過多點連接予Μ連接 至此訊號線; 一轉移控制器,連接至訊號線,轉移控制器在轉移控制 器與每一操作及控制端子當中交換轉移訊號*並且包括資 料對應於操作端子之操作區段之搡作之該轉移訊號,予以 傳輸至根據在轉移控制器設定之位址之間對應所規定之控 制端子* Μ控制連接至控制端子之負載,對應包括一供使 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) —------ L-----------11 訂· —-------' <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 操定 同子有 至 轉定 且 一設 一 端設 度 在設 並 使址及制址 強 且所 , 供位,控位 之 並段 址 一別子多制 載 ,區 位 及個端許控 負 址定 制 , 一 制至時 制 位設 控 係‘,控配同 控..別址 時 關係多分及 ,準個位 同 制關許同段 下水用別 用 控制各共區 況制使個. 使 別控至一定 狀控段在 段 個時址定設 列之區配 區 之同位設址 下 令理匹 理 聯之別供位 在 指處料 處 關聯個-別 段所子資 子 載關特段個 區段端址及端 負載獨區- 理 區令位Κ令 一負一定址 處作 指之;指 與多定設位 子操號括時號 段許設址制,端之訊 包址訊 區與供位控子一子移所位移 作段-制時端中端轉號別轉 操區段控同制其作在訊個在 一作區 時之控 操 移之 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1 4350 49¾ ' as C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 區 定 設 址 位 制 控 時 同 在 配 匹 料。 資時 址址 位位第 之制圍 括控範 包時利 所同專 號 之 請 訊定申 移設如 轉所 CM 在段 控 時 同 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 控 移 轉 中 其 -T 統& ί 位名 a監 f 控 控 遙 時 1—. 之 司 項 多lr 許第 定 圖 設範 段利 區專 定請 設申 址如 位 3 制 段 區 定 設 址 位 $ 控 時 同 之 子 端 制 控 1 ο 每址 在位 線制 號控 訊時 由 同 藉一 器定 制設 變 改 在 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 據同 依 之 一 子 定端 設制 器控 制至 控址 移位 轉制 ’ 控 形時 情 同 之 新 址之 第位得 圍別獲 範個 , 利之址 專子位 請端別 申制個 如控後 4.一 變 任改 控 移 轉 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 3 。 第 段 圍 區範 定利 設專 址請 位申 制如 控5. 時 否 是 址 位 制 控 時 同 之 子 端 制 控 至 _ 傳 査 檢 供 : 置 括裝 包査 器檢 制 段 區 定 設 。 址 址 位位 制 制 控控 時時 同 同 之之 子回 端返第 制子圍 控端範 在制利 定控專 設自請 Μ 號申 予訊如 配移 β 匹轉 藉 並 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - — III —--訂.-------I 、 統 糸 視 監 控 遙 之 項 3 控 移 專 _ 中 其 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 子確 端正 制 一 控定 一 設 每 供 在並 定 ’ 設址 査位 檢制 , 控 時時 統同 系 之 動段 啟區 在定 供設 , 址 :置位 括裝制 包定控 器設時 制 同 時 同 之 定 Μ 予 來 原 於 同 不 址 位 $ 控 時 同 ο 至子 址端 位制 制控 控之 時制 同控 器 $ 控 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 第 圃 範 利 專 請 申 如 括 包 子 端 本紙張尺度適用十國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 2 4 '^5 0 4 9,^ I D8六、申請專利範圍 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 致如示自作制 制轉處 傳資控計速減 導據指器操控 ^ 控之子 已之始段整衰 Μ 依M制之他 ^ 時址端 _ 化在間開區調 ,^«間 ,; 予控子其 Μ 同位之3«變中時減理之率 ξ 時 子回段移端聯 ξ 同制子Μ所其要衰處準速 減 及端返區轉作關 ΐ 相控端 有-需輸子水整 ξ 衰 Μ制科示在操段 全時制 而統所傳端載調 Μ 之 , 控資顯其與區 Θ 完同控 ^ 址系準號之負之 i 化 异 系 現 準及視之-制作 一括一 。^位視水訊子標時 Η 變 水作監子子控操 Η 至包每準 ^ 制監載移端目料 ^ 所 載操之端端畤與 ^ 載藉,水 ^ 控控負轉制至資 ^ 有 負有準作制同制 U 負在時載^時遙標藉控準制 Μ 子 之所水操控藉控 減及料負 U 同之目器 一水控 頃端 載詢載在別,時 衰Μ資之 Μ 摟項減制每載始。OJI制 負輪負新各時同 1 供,制内8J1根gl衰控且負開準 Μ 控 示序際更詢號藉 第,子控間第其01及移並減減水 Μ 一 指順實,輪訊不 圍間端始時圍,gg準轉,衰衰載gl每 供器於料及移於 範時制開減範間JI水,子供收負JI據 , 制關資 Μ 轉先 利減控減衰利時Ift載後端内接標Iff根 段控子視·,收優 專衰之衰在專減11負子制間在目||輸 iF 區移端監準接, 請一配收減請衰^|標端控時據至^5]傳 示轉制之水子聯 申輸分接衰申輸 目制至減根準 可 顧中控回載端關。如傳所號段如傳¾於控料衰並水.5D器 1 其一 返負作段子8.器址訊區9.器10關 至資在,載Π制 每此之操區端 制位移理 制 輸料制算率負 控 ---1 ----'裝--------訂·!------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 3 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 在衰 端且載轉段 g 段 之 及並 奪。作並負及區 —區 一一 段 以, 卩間操,得W示3|示 1 區 A- .Π 1^0 , 率 Ϊ 時中載獲.,顯 ξ.顯 作 其 Μ QP 時速·ί減其負子示換 Ϊ 供 操 址整¾衰,之端指切 $查 $ 之 位調 d 之統聯制之性。4 檢 0 子 制之 化糸關控段擇段 及 t 端 控時 視II自區選區㈤定 ⑼作 時料 所監狀據示供作^1設 ^操 同資 |有控作根_,操|^供 ^ ^ 段控 端之之料子裝子 號 P據 區始 2 制項示資端換端4Γ訊lr根 定開。以控^1指制作切作il換 第供 設減準 一 供控操法操11交 圍, 址衰水 每 ,輸在方一 置 範置 位收載 d 據段傳一示每Jr裝 利装 制接負㈣根iil區器換顧供lit部 專換 控段標 f 輸 示制切括備 ^外。請切 時區目^1傳1顯控態包法?)8一法申法 同理至 可 α 1 移狀器方卩與方如方 在處載.器.¾括轉作制示 ί 器示 6 制 定子負13制14包中操控顯15制顯1控 設端減 控 子其 之移之 控之 4 3 5 Ο 4 9as B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 1 2 .如申請専利範園第1 0項之遙控監視系統,轉移控制 器傳輸關於目標負載水準及衰減目標負載水準所需要時間 之資料*至同時控制位址所分配之許多控制端子,並藉轉 移訊號傳輸衰減開始控制資料至各別控制端子藉*轉移訊 號包括作為同時控制位址之位址資料,並且其中每一控制 端子之端子處理區段計算在衰減時間內供衰減目標負載水 準之調整速率,並且根據在轉移訊號命令端子處理區段使 用同時控制位址時,在轉移訊號所包括之位址資料匹配於 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4 L I ' — 111! — — -----— —II I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 35 0 4 9、, I 六、申請專利範圍 法 方 制 控 載 負 換 切 性 擇 選 序 程 作 操 WU 芾 控 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 6 1L 第 圍 矩 利 專 請 申 如 観 撞 - 負 N HU ο 月 一 共 括間 包之 法段 方區 法 方 制 控 化 先 少 至 且 並 作 操 在 如 法 方 此 在 載 負 一 au9 啟 段 區 作 操 負 化 負 先制 謖控 作段 操區 後.作 稍操 一 化 及先 K 優 , 之 效動 無作 便以 斷予 中後 之稍 段一 區藉 作供 操 丨 1 法 另方 藉制 載控 制 移 控 轉 化 中 先 其 優 , - ο 统 糸 視 監 控 遙 之 項 6 1X 第 圍 範 利 專 請 申 D P lii 6¾ ο 0 在負 除之 排用 僅共 作間 動之 斷段 中 區 之作 關操 開多 一 許 另之 自配 且分 並所 , 法 載方 段 區 示 顯 供 査 檢Μ 定 設 供 號 訊 換 交 置 裝 β. 咅 外。 一 法 與方 器示 制顯 控之 第 圍 範 利 專 請 申 D $ (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 控 一 多單 許與 中置 其位 , 元 統位 糸 中 視其 監 * 控體 遙憶 之ΙΒ LJH定 L設 址 位 括 包 子 端 作 操Κ msr 任端 之作 體操 憶為 記作 定 用 設 使 址K 位予 在址 定位 設置 以位 予元 標位 旗於 址應 位對 一 及 及 , ’ 置 聯位 關 元 址 位 位何 址 位 之 子 為 観 tw 負 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 11 第 圍 範 利 專 請 如 -------- 訂---------I . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 區括 作包 操 ’ 之 號 相移 制轉 控 一 組輸 與傳 一 序 於順 應器 對 制 Hy^u Ϊ 挡 收移 在轉 且 * 並時 , 料 載資 負之 明動 照 作 一 段 度控 亮時 光同 標括 目 包 之 -載 號 負訊 明移 照轉 一 一 每輸 之 傳 櫧 矣 037 ίτ 闞 _ 址器 位制 別控 個移 一 轉 及 且 制並 控 ’ 組 準 與水 。端時 no. 作作同 操操配 制中匹 控其料 行 * 資 進統址 始糸位 開視之 載監括 負控包 明遙所 照之號 令項訊 指Ml移 ms _ ,睹在 料 U 段 * ;區 0 ^0 Ϊ 控 Μ 處 申 Μ ϋ子 址$端 位21之 制 子 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 5 4 35 Ο 4 9” 六、申請專利範圍 區 作 操 動 作 於 應 對 括 包 號 訊 移 轉 輸 傳 時 址 位 制 控 料 資 之 段 端 作 操 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 1Χ 第 圍 範 利 專 請 申 如 包 其 且 並 線 : 號有 訊具 至 子 接端 連作 以操 予定 其設 子段 端區 作示 操顯 定 Κ 設段 一 區 含作 包操 子括 及 以 幕 螢 - 之 形器 圖示 及顯 元在 字« 示 重 指 , 能板 * 控 器觸 示明 顯透 在關 , 容 擇內 選之 間器 之 示 式顯 模與 作 至 操配 一 分 與一 式於 模應 定對 設理 一 處 在定 • 設 段有 區 ’ 制式 控模 一 定 設 區操確 作用及 操使, 應少理 響至處 , 含 之 式包份 模理部 作處 一 操之之 在段應 , 區 對 作制定 操控設 之及, 段Μ理 區,處 作理之 操處關 之行開 板進為 控作作 觸操段 之之區 聯段作 ίη 理 處 之 應 對 定 定 設 中 其 統 糸 視 監 控 遙 之 項 2 2 第 圍 範 利 專 請 甲 如 一 件 與附 距線 間配 裝列 安串 其方 , 正 段大 區 一 裝於 安等 一 上 有小 ’ 大 件在 装一 安 , 一 同 括相 包者 子架 端框 作裝 操安 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 少附 至線 及配 Μ至 ; 緊 件旋 裝以 安予 fc bt 至 一 著 ’ 附段 可區 , 件 件靥 附附 線一 配為 之作 數, 倍孔 整裝 之安 寸 盒 尺 一 内 其 至 入 插 Μ 予 可 訂 螺 盒 之 盒 關 ΗΒ 之 件 制 控 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 2 2 第 圍 範 利 專 請 Φ 如 址區 位 作 之操 鞔至 負址 於位 應 之 對段 於區 等作 相操 一 之 配子 分端 , 作 式操 模 之 定 應 設對 在 一 , 對 2 一 酉 一 分種 段 一 區成 個 之 配 分 段 區 作 操 之 子 端 作 操 作 操 式 模 作 操動 在啟 且 % 並藉 * 址 段位 観 UB- 負 斷 中 本紙張尺度遶用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 6 435049 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 制 控 中 其 統 系 視 監 控 遙 之 項 2 2 第 圍 範 利 專 請 申 如 5 2 成 址 位 之 钱 1Π*Γ 負 多 許 於 應 對 於 等 相 1 配 分 式 模 定 設 在 段 區 之使 子 ,動 端式啟 作模 Μ 操作藉 之操, 應在址 對及位 多 ,組 很段之 對區配 一 作分 種操段 至 區 址作 位操 組之 之子 址端 位作 之操 份作 部操 作者 操用 斷 屋 中 同 相 成 載 負 許 態 狀 含 包 子 端 作 操 定 設 種 在 擇 選 間 及之 Μ 式 ; 模 幕作 螢操 ; 之 一 形器與 圖示式 及顯模 元在定 字«設 示重 一 指,在 掂板, , 控段 器觸區 示明制 顯透控 關 區 容作 内操 之 應 器響 示 , 顯式 與模 至 作 配操 分在 一 , 於作 應操 對之 理 段 處區 定作 設操 有之 , 板 式控 横觸 定 之 設聯 操確 用及 價 , 少理 至處 含之 包份 HE 理 音 處 一 之 之 段懕 區對 制定 控設 及 I 以理 ’ 處 理之 處關 。 行開理 進為處 作作之 操段應 之區對 段作定 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--------訂·!--線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x 297公釐) 7435049 ^ Jaw C8 D8 VI. Patent application scope 1, a remote monitoring system * contains: Many operation terminals, each of which is assigned an address, an operation section is provided at each operation terminal; many control terminals * are connected to separate allocations A load with a unique address, each control terminal is provided with a terminal processing section; a signal line, the operation terminal and the control terminal are connected to this signal line through a multi-point connection; a transfer controller, connected to the signal line, and transferred controller The transfer signal is exchanged between the transfer controller and each operation and control terminal * and the transfer signal including the data corresponding to the operation section of the operation terminal is transmitted to the correspondence between the addresses set in the transfer controller The specified control terminal * Μ controls the load connected to the control terminal, correspondingly includes a paper for making the paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------- L --- -------- 11 Orders --------- '< Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Make the site and the site strong, provide, and control the location of the site and a lot of load control, location and end permit control negative address customization, one system to set up a control system to control the same position .. The relationship between multiple sites is more diversified. The quasi-personal system controls the launch of the same segment. It controls the status of each common area. It allows the segment to be controlled to a certain state. The co-located location of the district ordered the liaison of the liaison unit to be linked at the reference point-the end address and end load of the section of the subsection of the subsection, the subsection, the subsection, and the end section. The address is referred to; refers to the multi-set seat operation number including the hour number segment allowed addressing system, the end of the message package address area and the position control unit are moved by a sub-segment-the time-end mid-end number Do not transfer to the same sector control system. It is printed by the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs when it is controlled in the same area. 1 4350 49¾ 'as C8 D8. At the same time, match the materials. The system of the time and address address covers the request for the control of Bao Shili and the same special number. The application for the transfer is set as the transfer CM. At the time of the segment control, the system is based on the remote control of the project. System & til name a supervisor f control and control remote time 1-. The company's project is more than lr Control 1 ο When the address of each location is controlled by the same line, it is customized by a borrower to change the setting. In the system, it depends on the remote monitoring of the remote control. According to one of the fixed-end device controllers, the control is shifted to the control address. The transformation of the new site's position when it is in the shape of control may be awarded to the new site. For the special site of the favorable site, please apply for the system. After the change of control 4. The change of control is based on the monitoring of the remote Item 3. In the paragraph, Fan Dingli, please set up a special address, please apply for the control system. 5. Whether the address control is the same as the child control to the _ pass the inspection and inspection supplies: Set up the package inspection unit to set up the inspection zone. The address control system is always the same as the son of the same party. Back to the sub-system, the sub-controller is controlled by the fan. The system is set up for profit control. Please apply for the number M. If you want to transfer and transfer β β (please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again)--III --- Order .-------- I, Tongshou despise monitoring remote item 3 Control and Transfer Special _ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The subordinate system has one control and one setting for each location and location. The location check system is located at the same time as the control section of the same sector. The location is set to include the installation package and the controller. At the same time, the same order M Yulai original from the same address $ control time is the same ο to the sub-site end control system control time control system controller $ control, which is based on the remote monitoring of the project For example, the paper size of the bun end is applicable to the ten national standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 2 4 '^ 5 0 4 9, ^ I D8 The system caused a rapid decrease in the transfer of capital control measures as shown in the self-made system According to the device control ^ The control son has been completely declining according to the other system of M ^ time address _ tuned in the open zone, ^ «between, 予 子 control of its M parity 3« change in the reduction The rate of ξ when the child moves back to the end of the connection ξ The speed of the attenuation of the same system M is reduced, and the return zone is turned off The full-time system and system uploading and downloading M, the control of the capital show that it is the same as the control of the area Θ ^ The address of the negative number is different from the current standard and is considered-production one. ^ Depending on the time mark of the water signal, change the water to be a sub-control operation of the monitor ^ to control the terminal and move the terminal material ^ The terminal operation and the ^ load borrowing of the operation, the water ^ control and control are transferred to Assets ^ have quasi-production system and system U load at the time ^ time remote standard borrow control quasi system M control of the water control borrow control reduction and material load U with the same target device a water control terminal is contained in the inquiry The reduction of the M 时 item of the time-defective M asset begins at the beginning of each load. The OJI system has a negative supply and a new supply at the same time. The 8J1 gl in the system has a fade control and a negative activation. The control sequence is updated, and the number of sub-controls is 01 and the water is reduced. , The round-robin is not the beginning of the round, gg quasi-turn, fading load gl each supply and transfer to the fan-time system to open and reduce the Fan JI water, the child supply and receipt of negative JI data, the system will be converted to the first profit reduction control When reducing the profit, ift, the back end is internally connected to the Iff root segment control sub-view, and the decline of the superior and the exclusive decay is in the reduction of the 11 negative sub-system. It is now available in the iF zone. Please decline ^ | standard end control to ^ 5] to report the conversion of the sub-subsidiary application of the sub-subsidiary application to the sub-defective application system to reduce the root of the standard, you can consider the central control to load the end. For example, the number of the section is as described in the control of material decay and water loss. One of the 5D devices 1 is negative. 8. The device address area 9. The device 10 is closed to the asset, and it contains the end-of-operation displacement of each operation area. The negative control of the calculation rate of the physical delivery system --- 1 ---- 'installation -------- order ·! ------ line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) The control is at the end and the sum of the paragraph g is reproduced. The operation is negative and the area is divided into one and one, and the time is between, and W is shown 3 | shows 1 area A-. Π 1 ^ 0, when the rate is 载, the load is shown, and ξ. Is shown as its MU QP speed · ί Decrease the negative sign to change the position for the entire operation, the end refers to the nature of the unified system of d to cut $ check $ position. 4 Checking the sub-system of the control system, the selection of the control section, and the t-end control are considered as the II self-selection constituency, and the supervision report of the work materials is shown to be used for ^ 1setting Operation | ^ Supply ^ ^ The material of the stage control terminal is set to P, the starting point of the system is 2 and the terminal of the information terminal is changed. To control ^ 1 refers to the production of cut il for the first set of reductions, one for control and control, and 11 for control. If the address declines, each party loses it and sets it up for reception. D According to the paragraph, it shows that each Jr is profitable. The installation and connection of the negative illuminant iil zone device is replaced by the special control section of the lit department. Please cut the time zone title ^ 1, pass 1 and display the control state method?) 8 One method applies the same method to α1, and the Fang Rufang and Fang Rufang are included here. 6 Develop the sub-negative 13 system and 14 packages to control the display 15 system display 1 control set to reduce the control of the control 4 3 5 Ο 4 9as B8 C8 D8 6. Application for patent scope 1 2. The remote monitoring system of 10 items, the transfer controller transmits information about the target load level and the time required to attenuate the target load level * to many control terminals assigned to the address at the same time, and the transfer signal is used to transmit the attenuation start control data to each The transfer signal of the control terminal includes the address data as the simultaneous control address, and the terminal processing section of each control terminal calculates the adjustment rate for the attenuation of the target load level during the decay time, and orders the terminal according to the transfer signal. When the simultaneous control address is used in the processing section, the address data included in the transfer signal matches the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 4 LI '— 111! — —- ----- II I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 4 35 0 4 9, 6, I 6. Application for Patent Scope Legal System Control Load Changeover Selective Procedures Operation WU Control and its system is based on visual monitoring远 之 项 6 1L Divide the right to apply for the application of Ru Ruo-negative N HU ο the month of the total paragraph of the law, the area of the law, the control of the legal system is as small as possible, and the operation is carried out as the French side A au9 start area is used as a negative operation system, and then controlled as a run operation area. After a little exercise is performed and K is first, no effect will be given to a later area in the middle and borrowed for operation 丨1 The other party takes the advantage of the transfer control by the load control first.-Ο 糸 糸 糸 糸 监控 监控 遥 遥 之 之 X 6 1X Wei Fanli specifically requested to apply for DP lii 6¾ ο 0 In the case of negative division, only inter-action The operation of the central section of the broken section is open for additional self-provisioning and decentralization, and the method of displaying the section in the section of the French section is for inspection and verification. It is set for signal exchange and installation. Β. 咅 外. The first method and the square display display control of Fan Li, please apply for D $ (please read the note on the back? Matters and then fill out this page) control more than a single license and the center, Yuantong position 糸 CTV Its supervisor * Controlling body remote memory IB LJH Set L Addressing position includes bun end operation K msr Ren Duan ’s position gymnastics setting is used for record setting K position is set to in-situ position setting bit is set to position mark In terms of address application, you should consider, 'Set the joint position, the location of the element, and the child of the address as 観 tw. In the negative, the system depends on the remote monitoring item. -Order --------- I. The phase of the printing and printing system of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, which includes printing and contracting, is a phase-shifting system that transfers a set of input and transmission sequences in the sequence of the device pairing Hy ^ u Ϊ Blocking and shifting, and * Synchronization, the bright movement of the material load is controlled for a period of time, and the time is the same as the standard-the negative load information is transferred to the transmission of each loss. 037 ίτ 阚 _ Address control, control and control, and control and control . Duanshi no. As the same operation, the control of the material line in the preparation of the equipment * Zijin unified site starting position of the open monitoring, including the negative control Bao Mingyao according to the order, according to the order message Ml shift ms _, see in the U Section *; Zone 0 ^ 0 Ϊ Control Office 申 址 Subsite address $ end position 21 system This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 5 4 35 Ο 4 9 ”6 The operation of the patent application area is to deal with the operation of the section that includes the control of the location and control of the material when the signal is transferred and transmitted. The system is based on the remote monitoring and control item 1X. And parallel line: No. has the signal to the sub-connector to perform the operation. It sets the end section of the sub-section as a display operation. Sets the first section of the section to include the package operation and the screen screen-shape icon and display element. In the word «indicates weight, the touch panel of the control panel is clearly transparent, and the display mode and operation of the internal selection can be divided into one point and one mode. Setting • There are zones in the system The role and operation should be done everywhere, including the inclusive mold department, where the operation should be carried out, the operation of the area should be controlled, and the operation area should be handled by the area. Guan Zhixing opened the board as the control section for the operation of the section of the joint section as the management department's response to the set in the set of its contempt for monitoring and monitoring of remote items 2 2 Wai Fanli specifically asked for a piece with a distance line The equipment is arranged in a series, and the large section is installed on the installation. There is a small 'large installation on the installation' together with the package holder's end frame for installation (please read the note on the back first) Please fill in this page for further information.) The Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints the attached to the line and distributes it to; the fasteners are screwed on to install fc bt to a letter ', and the attached section is attached to the line 1. It is equipped with a number of holes, the size of an inch-inch box ruler, which is inserted into the box, and the box key Η of the orderable screw box, which is controlled by the remote control item 2 2 Specially requested Φ as the location of the operation The negative address should be the gamete end of the corresponding pair of segments in the zone, etc., and the mode of operation should be set to one, and the pair of sections is divided into two sections. The operating mode of the child's terminal is in the open and %% borrowed. * UB- UB- Negative breaking Chinese paper standard uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 6 435049 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The scope of the patent application control is based on the remote monitoring item 2 2 Fan Li specially requested to apply as 5 2 The money of the address 1Π * Γ is more negative than the equivalent phase 1 In the section of the ambassador, the operation of the end-type start-up mode M operation should be performed on the address pair and the position, and the group of the very pair is allocated a segment operation to the child address of the position operation group. The operator of the operation department of the operation department uses the in-phase load in the broken house to carry the Xu state, including the end of the bun. The operation is set in the selection mode and the M mode; the screen is used for the fluorescent operation; a shaper and the icon Formula and The model element is set in the fixed word «set the display weight one finger, on the fascia board, the touch control of the segment controller shows the transparent display of the control zone to act as the internal operation of the device. First, the control section of the control section should be designed and operated. The plate control and cross-touch control are designed to be used and the price is low. Establish control and I'm responsible. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Install -------- Order ·!-The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The paper size printed by the employee consumer cooperative is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210x 297 mm) 7
TW88110732A 1998-06-25 1999-06-25 Remote supervisory control system TW435049B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP19682498A JP3752852B2 (en) 1998-06-25 1998-06-25 Remote monitoring and control system
JP10179437A JP2000012242A (en) 1998-06-25 1998-06-25 Lighting control system
JP10178361A JP2000013415A (en) 1998-06-25 1998-06-25 Remote supervisory and control system
JP17835998A JP3718999B2 (en) 1998-06-25 1998-06-25 Remote monitoring and control system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW435049B true TW435049B (en) 2001-05-16

Family

ID=27474815

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW88110732A TW435049B (en) 1998-06-25 1999-06-25 Remote supervisory control system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CA (1) CA2276453C (en)
TW (1) TW435049B (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI382787B (en) * 2007-10-19 2013-01-11 Panasonic Corp Load control system
TWI396412B (en) * 2009-03-25 2013-05-11 Panasonic Corp Load control system
TWI451768B (en) * 2009-03-25 2014-09-01 Panasonic Corp Load control system

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102065618A (en) 2004-07-02 2011-05-18 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 Method for driving a lamp in a lighting system and a control apparatus for driving such lamp

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI382787B (en) * 2007-10-19 2013-01-11 Panasonic Corp Load control system
TWI396412B (en) * 2009-03-25 2013-05-11 Panasonic Corp Load control system
TWI451768B (en) * 2009-03-25 2014-09-01 Panasonic Corp Load control system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2276453C (en) 2003-11-11
CA2276453A1 (en) 1999-12-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6459938B1 (en) Remote supervisory control system
CN207399375U (en) A kind of image mosaic control device
CN109219987A (en) The lighting system of connection
KR101113566B1 (en) Monitoring and control device
JP2008532166A (en) Control interface for home automation system and its operation method
CN108702834A (en) Wireless switching
TW435049B (en) Remote supervisory control system
CA2262187A1 (en) Control station for control system with automatic detection and configuration of control elements
JP6069864B2 (en) Monitoring terminal and lighting control system using the monitoring terminal
JP2008271437A (en) Switch apparatus
CN206525949U (en) Food processing apparatus and its ECU and LCD MODULE
US20150081042A1 (en) Intelligent interactive control system for electrical devices
JPH0439564A (en) Concentration control system for air conditioner
JPS5825462Y2 (en) Terminal device with pictorial display
JP5102794B2 (en) Supervisory control device
KR101981973B1 (en) System for controlling electric lamp light
JP7423960B2 (en) lighting control system
JP4419927B2 (en) vending machine
JP2007043266A (en) Remote controller
JP3684810B2 (en) Remote monitoring and control system
JP2009110465A (en) Vending machine
CN212013143U (en) Intelligent acousto-optic scene display master control device and control system
JP2010256753A (en) Projector
JPS635042Y2 (en)
CN111668046A (en) Panel switch with multiple identification lamplight

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees